<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="pl">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Deraadt</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - Wkład użytkownika [pl]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Deraadt"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/Specjalna:Wk%C5%82ad/Deraadt"/>
	<updated>2026-05-21T10:26:40Z</updated>
	<subtitle>Wkład użytkownika</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=112351</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=112351"/>
		<updated>2014-05-07T05:33:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Updating after recent functional changes&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ordering can be done by times/deadlines or by the ordering of activities in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Overview_of_students.png|thumb|right|The overview page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* There is an overview page allowing teachers to see the progress of all students in a class, which is helpful for finding students at risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=06LA5Cv9Fhw&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up a Progress Bar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose to:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Monitor all activities (pre-fills configuration page)&lt;br /&gt;
#* Select which activities to monitor (start from scratch)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; and those you don&#039;t to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration).&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ekH8IfCyGzM&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
** Petras Virzintas for contributing queries for Turnitin support&lt;br /&gt;
** Willian Mano for helping with the modern look CSS&lt;br /&gt;
** Matthieu Rolland for contributing queries for the Questionnaire module&lt;br /&gt;
** Johan Reinalda for contributing global config changes for block colours&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=111738</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=111738"/>
		<updated>2014-04-14T04:54:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding Johan Reinalda&amp;#039;s contribution&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ordering can be done by times/deadlines or by the ordering of activities in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Overview_of_students.png|thumb|right|The overview page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* There is an overview page allowing teachers to see the progress of all students in a class, which is helpful for finding students at risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d43KVlMBmLA &amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
** Petras Virzintas for contributing queries for Turnitin support&lt;br /&gt;
** Willian Mano for helping with the modern look CSS&lt;br /&gt;
** Matthieu Rolland for contributing queries for the Questionnaire module&lt;br /&gt;
** Johan Reinalda for contributing global config changes for block colours&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=111195</id>
		<title>Assignment settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=111195"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T03:35:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Undo revision 111194 by Deraadt (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Assignment}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This page describes settings for the new Assignment module in Moodle 2.3 onwards. For documentation on Assignments (2.2) settings, see [https://docs.moodle.org/22/en/Assignment_settings Assignment settings] in the 2.2 docs.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing an Assignment activity==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new Assignment activity to your course, login with the appropriate access rights (e.g.editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Within the required Week or Topic Block click Add and Activity or Resource link. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the Add an activity or resource dialogue box that appears, select Assignment and click Add.&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit an existing Assignment activity, login to your course with the appropriate access rights (e.g. editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Select the Update icon against the relevant Assignment item.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, after logging into your course simply click on the name of the Assignment activity you wish to edit and then click the Edit Settings link under Assignment administration within the Settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available when creating or editing/updating any Assignment activity. Only General,Availability and Submission types are open by default;the others are collapsed. To expand everything, click the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right. &lt;br /&gt;
Click on any screenshot to see it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General ==&lt;br /&gt;
The General section allows you to give your assignment a name and description. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:assignmentgeneral26.png|General settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment name===&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Assignment a name (e.g. “Report on Topic 1 Content”). The title entered here will be the name that learners see in the course content area. Learners will click on this name to view the details of the assignment and, if applicable, submit their work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. &lt;br /&gt;
Click the icon on the left to expand the toolbar and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also provide information or resources related to the assignment, such as a video clip, an image, or a link to a webpage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the assignment activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:AssignAvailability.png|thumb|450px|Availability settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Allow submissions from===&lt;br /&gt;
The Allow submissions from setting prevents students from submitting their assignment before the shown date. A teacher can to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) from which learners can begin to submit their assignments. Please note that this setting does not hide the activity from the learners. Instead, the learner will see the activity, be able to view the instructions and use any materials you have included in the description, but the learner will not be able to submit or complete the assignment until the Allow submissions from date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is enabled (ticked/checked) by default and is set at the day and time you added the assignment. To disable this, remove the tick/check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Due date===&lt;br /&gt;
The Due date setting establishes when the assignment is due. Submissions will still be allowed after this date, but any assignments submitted after this date are marked as late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows an teacher to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) before which learners must submit their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the Due date is Enabled (ticked) and is set at 7 days ahead of the day and time you selected Add Assignment. To disable this feature, simply ensure the Enable checkbox is not marked. For more information on using the Due Date see Assignment FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Assignments without a Due date will appear on the My home page with “No Due date” displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cut-off date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cut-off date is the date beyond which students will not be able to send in their assignment as the button for doing so will no longer be displayed. After that date (or time) a teacher may, on request, grant an extension by going to the class assignment grading screen, clicking the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; column and choosing &amp;quot;grant extension&amp;quot; for the relevant student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this Youtube screencast [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaL0LzZwyYI&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Assignment Extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Always show description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is used in conjunction with the Allow submissions from setting. If it is set to Yes, the assignment Description will become visible to students at the Allow submissions from date. If it is set to No, the assignment Description will be hidden from students until the Allow submissions from date, only the assignment Name will be displayed as shown in the screenshot below. (Click to see full size.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:alwaysshowdescription.png|thumb|450px|Always show description]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Allow submissions from is disabled, then this setting has no meaning: the assignment description will always be visible to students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26submissioncomments.png|thumb|450px|Select the type of submission here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide how you wish students to submit their work to you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if Submission comments are enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment&amp;gt;Submission plugins&#039;&#039; then students will be able to add a note to their teacher on submitting work. If Blind marking is enabled, student comments display as from &amp;quot;Participant 01 etc&amp;quot; to avoid revealing identities. These comments will appear in the grading table in the Submission comments column.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Online text===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can type their response directly in Moodle using the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can upload and edit one or more files of any type the teacher can  open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the student uploads a pdf file, the teacher can annotate it within the browser, and on saving, the annotated file is made available to the student. See section 5.3.1 Annotating pdfs in [[Using Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This requires Ghostscript to be enabled on the server. This can be checked in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignments&amp;gt;Feedback plugins&amp;gt;Annotate pdf&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of uploaded files===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the maximum number of files which may be uploaded by each learner. (It might be helpful to display the number in the assignment description.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum submission size===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting specifies the maximum size per file of each of the files that the students can upload as part of their submission. This maximum upload size may only be equal to or less than the course limit (which in turn may only be equal to or less than the site limit). The maximum size of each file is displayed to students at the point where they upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submission comments.jpg|thumb|Submission comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:maximum file size.jpg|thumb|Maximum file size]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Feedback types==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedbacktypes.png|Feedback types]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this to yes means that markers can leave feedback comments for each submission. It enables the Feedback Comments column in the grading table.(To access the grading table, click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback comments are also accessible by clicking on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback comments.jpg|thumb|The Feedback comments column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FIle:feedback comments 2.jpg|thumb|Type feedback comments into the box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to yes, the teacher will have a link to download the grading list as a spreadsheet. They will then be able to enter grades and feedback comments offline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:emptygradebook.png|thumb|The empty gradebook on Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:downloadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|The dropdown to download the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:excelgrades.png|thumb|Editing the grades offline]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher has completed their grading offline, they can then upload the spreadsheet, confirm the changes and the grades and comments will be transferred over into Moodle&#039;s gradebook:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:uploadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|Uploading the grading worksheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:confirmchanges.png|thumb|Confirming the changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fullgradebook.png|thumb|Grades and feedback transferred into Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/11/19/offline-grading-worksheet-in-moodle-2-4-assignment/ Offline grading worksheet] blog post by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows  markers to upload files with feedback when marking. These files may be the marked up student assignments, documents with comments, a completed marking guide, or spoken audio feedback. It enables the Feedback Files column in the grading table. (To access the  grading table click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;)To upload feedback files, click on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table and then upload either with drag and drop or using the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback is displayed to students on the assignment submission page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files.jpg|thumb|The Feedback files column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files 2.jpg|thumb|Upload files here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback view for students.jpg|thumb|Student view with comments and file feedback both enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Uploading multiple feedback files====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to upload multiple feedback files as a zip, from the dropdown above the grading list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the students&#039; assignments using the &amp;quot;Download all submissions&amp;quot; link from the same dropdown menu;&lt;br /&gt;
#Extract the folder offline and add your comments to the student&#039;s submissions.Keep the names the same.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the students&#039; submissions and zip them into a new folder. Important: Don&#039;t just edit them inside their original folder and re-zip this; it will not work. The folder name does not matter as long as the feedback files have the same names as before.&lt;br /&gt;
#Upload this newly zipped folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be presented with a confirmation screen displaying your feedback files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:mutiplefeedbackzip.png|thumb|Choose from the dropdown menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip1.png|thumb|Confirmation screen displaying the feedback files to be uploaded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip2.png|thumb|Screen confirming uploaded feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you zip files on a Mac, you may get a folder included in the zip called _MACOSX_ which needs to be removed otherwise moodle will not recognise the changes in the files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionsettings.png|Submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Require students click submit button===&lt;br /&gt;
Students can upload draft versions of the assignment until such time as they are ready to submit.Once they click the submit button they indicate to the teacher that they have finished working on the assignment. In earlier versions of Moodle this was called &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Send for marking&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can then longer edit their submission. If they need to change it, they must ask the teacher who can revert the assignment to draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To revert to the draft stage, click on the assignment activity and then View/Grade all Submissions. Locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Revert the submission to draft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No, then students do not have to to click a submit button and are able to make changes to uploaded files at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No but the teacher wishes to grade students work, then you can stop students from making further changes by using Prevent submission changes. Prevent submission changes can also be used in cases where students have neglected to click the Submit button and grading has commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent submission changes, click on the assignment activity, then click on the View/Grade all submissions button. On the grading table, locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Prevent submission changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:revert to draft.jpg|thumb|Reverting to draft]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prevent submission changes.jpg|thumb|Prevent submission changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:with selected.jpg|thumb|&amp;quot;With selected&amp;quot;..]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require that students accept the Submission statement===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can define a &amp;quot;Submission statement&amp;quot;, ie, a statement where students promise the work is their own and which they must agree to before submitting their work. This may be done via &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If preferred, the available default statement which may be used instead: &#039;&#039;This assignment is my own work, except where I have acknowledged the use of the works of other people&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has given teachers the option of using a submission statement or not, then it will be available in the assignment settings screen. The section [[#Submission_Statement]] explains how an administrator can set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this blog post [http://ourlearning.co.uk/2012/10/moodle-assignment-all-my-own-work/ &amp;quot;All my own work&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this setting is enabled, students will have to check a button before they can submit their assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has forced the statement throughout the site, a teacher will not have this option in the settings but a student will see the statement when accessing their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attempts reopened===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the teacher to decide how submissions are reopened. The default is &amp;quot;Never&amp;quot;, in that students may only submit once. However, a teacher can set this to &amp;quot;Manually&amp;quot; and reopen it themselves for the student to resubmit, or to &amp;quot;Automatically until pass&amp;quot;. The student must then keep trying and resubmitting until they get a pass grade. [[Grade_items#Activity-based_grade_items|Passing grades]] are set in the Gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a student is allowed to resubmit, this setting will determine how many times they can resubmit before they are no longer allowed to do so. (For example, if a student has to keep trying until they get a pass grade, the teacher might decide that ten attempts is enough even though they have not yet passed!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsubmissionsettings.png|Group submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Students submit in groups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, then students are able to collaborate on an assignment. This might involve for example, working in the same online text area, or one student uploading an MS Powerpoint which another student downloads, improves and re-uploads to the common assignment area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grading, the teacher may choose to give a common grade and feedback to all students in the group or to give individual grades and feedback to each member.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no groups have been made, then Moodle will make a default group of every student in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details see this Youtube video [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G16gYZJFCrM&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Group Assignment 2.4]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require all group members submit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if the teacher has ticked the &amp;quot;Require students click submit button&amp;quot; earlier. The assignment will not be classed as &amp;quot;submitted&amp;quot; until all members of the group have made a contribution. When one student has submitted, the other members of the group will be able to see who still has to submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping for student groups===&lt;br /&gt;
If a particular grouping is selected here, then the gradebook will display any other groups and non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;, while naming the group(s) that are in the chosen grouping. If &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; is selected, then the gradebook will display the names of all groups and put any non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;. See this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=216399#p942913 forum post on grouping for student groups] for examples of how this might be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:notifications25.png|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose) whenever a student submits an assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about late submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose)whenever a student submits a late assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:grade25.png|Grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the maximum grade or [[Scales|Scale]] to be applied to the assignment.  If you will not be giving a grade for the assignment, choose No Grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading method===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Simple direct grading (entering a grade or scale item)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubric]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade Category===&lt;br /&gt;
Any custom [[Grade_categories|Grade Categories]] that have been created within your site or course will be listed here and will be available for selection.  Select the required Grade Category to add this assignment as a [[Grade_items|Grade item]] within this Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Blind marking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is enabled, then a teacher will not see the names of students who have submitted their assignments. Instead, they will see randomly generated Participant numbers. (The student view of the assignment does not change.) This is also the case if student comments have been enabled. Once they have graded the assignment, it is however possible for teachers to see who submitted what by clicking on &amp;quot;Reveal student identities&amp;quot; in the Assignment settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Returning Marks to Students ====&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the nature of blind marking, the students cannot see the final grade until all of the students names have been revealed.  This is found in Assignment Settings &amp;gt; Reveal Student Names.  However, feedback comments will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Beacuse of this, the  level of anonymity might not suit the privacy requirements of your establishment. See this tracker entry MDL-35390 - &amp;quot;Blind Marking is not so blind&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on this feature, see this Youtube video [http://youtu.be/Biiw3E13mgM Blind marking in 2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking workflow===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
When set to Yes, teachers will be able to specify the stage they are at in their grading of individual assignments (as in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflow.png|thumb|Marking workflow state in the individual grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26quickgradingworkflow.png|thumb|Dropdown to select marking workflow state when quick grading]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One advantage of using marking workflow is that the grades can be hidden from students until they are set to &#039;Released&#039;. The actual list of steps are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Not marked (the marker has not yet started) &lt;br /&gt;
* In marking (the marker has started but not yet finished) &lt;br /&gt;
* Marking completed (the marker has finished but might need to go back for checking/corrections) &lt;br /&gt;
* In review (the marking is now with the teacher in charge for quality checking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Ready for release (the teacher in charge is satisfied with the marking but wait before giving students access to the marking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Released (the student can access the grades/feedback)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example use cases====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One marker, Marker, wants to release all grades at the same time &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple markers, &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking allocation===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If marking workflow (see above) is set to Yes, it is possible to enable marking allocation. This means that teachers can be selected to grade or review the submitted work of specific students. Colleagues can monitor progress through the displayed marking workflow states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflowallocatedmarkers.png|thumb|Allocated markers on the grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access settings==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Restrict_access_settings|Restrict access]] area becomes visible in Moodle activities and resource settings if [[Conditional_activities|Conditional Activities]] have been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity. See the Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=98208 Custom role for &#039;Course Monitor&#039;] forum discussion for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assignment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:exportownsubmission|Export own submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:grade|Grade assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:submit|Submit assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:view|View assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment settings===&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback plugin====&lt;br /&gt;
The comments that are pushed to the gradebook from the assignment are limited to a single text only comment. An Administrator can specify which of the feedback plugins will be push comments to the gradebook. On a standard Moodle install the choices are &amp;quot;Feedback comments&amp;quot; (default) or &amp;quot;Feedback file&amp;quot; but there may be additional options if your Moodle install contains additional feedback plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show recent submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows everyone to see notifications of submissions in [[Recent activity]] reports and the Recent Activity Block, within a course context.  Note that the default for this option is No which means students will not be able to see when classmates have submitted or updated any Assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Send submission receipt to students====&lt;br /&gt;
This switch will enable submission receipts for students. Students will receive a notification every time they successfully submit an assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ass_settings.jpg|thumb|350px|Submission receipts settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission Statement====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enter text in the box here which will appear when students are about to submit their assignment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:newsubmissionstatement.png|thumb|Admin view of Submission statement set up screen - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionstatement.png|thumb|Student view when about to submit - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is left as the default &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then teachers will have the choice within their own assignments to force this or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default assignment settings====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify here the default assignment settings which may be set as &#039;Advanced&#039; (ie, they will appear when clicking &#039;Show more&#039;) or &#039;Locked&#039; (ie the teacher cannot change them.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26assignmentdefaults.png|thumb|Default, Advanced and Locked checkboxes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment submission plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular submission plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====File submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum submission size&#039;&#039;&#039; An Administrator can specify the maximum size of any individual file uploaded within the assignment module across all courses on the site. This limit may be equal to or less than course file upload limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Online text submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, students will be able to send a message to their teacher when submitting their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment feedback plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular feedback plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
====Annotate pdf====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can upload stamps for teachers to use when annotating student pdfs.  You can also check the ghostscript path:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_116.png|thumb|Ghostscript not installed or incorrectly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_115.png|thumb|Ghostscript correctly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the default stamps are deleted by accident, they can be found in mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/pix and re-uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this will be enabled by default for all new assignments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Synergy Learning blog post: [http://www.synergy-learning.com/moodle-2-5-improvements-assignment-resubmissions/ Assignment resubmissions]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aufgabe konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un devoir]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:課題を追加/編集する]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de tarea]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=111194</id>
		<title>Assignment settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=111194"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T03:30:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Fixing link with target&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Assignment}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This page describes settings for the new Assignment module in Moodle 2.3 onwards. For documentation on Assignments (2.2) settings, see [https://docs.moodle.org/22/en/Assignment_settings Assignment settings] in the 2.2 docs.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing an Assignment activity==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new Assignment activity to your course, login with the appropriate access rights (e.g.editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Within the required Week or Topic Block click Add and Activity or Resource link. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the Add an activity or resource dialogue box that appears, select Assignment and click Add.&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit an existing Assignment activity, login to your course with the appropriate access rights (e.g. editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Select the Update icon against the relevant Assignment item.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, after logging into your course simply click on the name of the Assignment activity you wish to edit and then click the Edit Settings link under Assignment administration within the Settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available when creating or editing/updating any Assignment activity. Only General,Availability and Submission types are open by default;the others are collapsed. To expand everything, click the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right. &lt;br /&gt;
Click on any screenshot to see it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General ==&lt;br /&gt;
The General section allows you to give your assignment a name and description. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:assignmentgeneral26.png|General settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment name===&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Assignment a name (e.g. “Report on Topic 1 Content”). The title entered here will be the name that learners see in the course content area. Learners will click on this name to view the details of the assignment and, if applicable, submit their work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. &lt;br /&gt;
Click the icon on the left to expand the toolbar and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also provide information or resources related to the assignment, such as a video clip, an image, or a link to a webpage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the assignment activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:AssignAvailability.png|thumb|450px|Availability settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Allow submissions from===&lt;br /&gt;
The Allow submissions from setting prevents students from submitting their assignment before the shown date. A teacher can to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) from which learners can begin to submit their assignments. Please note that this setting does not hide the activity from the learners. Instead, the learner will see the activity, be able to view the instructions and use any materials you have included in the description, but the learner will not be able to submit or complete the assignment until the Allow submissions from date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is enabled (ticked/checked) by default and is set at the day and time you added the assignment. To disable this, remove the tick/check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Due date===&lt;br /&gt;
The Due date setting establishes when the assignment is due. Submissions will still be allowed after this date, but any assignments submitted after this date are marked as late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows an teacher to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) before which learners must submit their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the Due date is Enabled (ticked) and is set at 7 days ahead of the day and time you selected Add Assignment. To disable this feature, simply ensure the Enable checkbox is not marked. For more information on using the Due Date see Assignment FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Assignments without a Due date will appear on the My home page with “No Due date” displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cut-off date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cut-off date is the date beyond which students will not be able to send in their assignment as the button for doing so will no longer be displayed. After that date (or time) a teacher may, on request, grant an extension by going to the class assignment grading screen, clicking the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; column and choosing &amp;quot;grant extension&amp;quot; for the relevant student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this Youtube screencast [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaL0LzZwyYI&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Assignment Extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Always show description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is used in conjunction with the Allow submissions from setting. If it is set to Yes, the assignment Description will become visible to students at the Allow submissions from date. If it is set to No, the assignment Description will be hidden from students until the Allow submissions from date, only the assignment Name will be displayed as shown in the screenshot below. (Click to see full size.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:alwaysshowdescription.png|thumb|450px|Always show description]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Allow submissions from is disabled, then this setting has no meaning: the assignment description will always be visible to students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26submissioncomments.png|thumb|450px|Select the type of submission here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide how you wish students to submit their work to you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if Submission comments are enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment&amp;gt;Submission plugins&#039;&#039; then students will be able to add a note to their teacher on submitting work. If Blind marking is enabled, student comments display as from &amp;quot;Participant 01 etc&amp;quot; to avoid revealing identities. These comments will appear in the grading table in the Submission comments column.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Online text===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can type their response directly in Moodle using the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can upload and edit one or more files of any type the teacher can  open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the student uploads a pdf file, the teacher can annotate it within the browser, and on saving, the annotated file is made available to the student. See section 5.3.1 Annotating pdfs in [[Using Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This requires Ghostscript to be enabled on the server. This can be checked in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignments&amp;gt;Feedback plugins&amp;gt;Annotate pdf&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of uploaded files===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the maximum number of files which may be uploaded by each learner. (It might be helpful to display the number in the assignment description.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum submission size===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting specifies the maximum size per file of each of the files that the students can upload as part of their submission. This maximum upload size may only be equal to or less than the course limit (which in turn may only be equal to or less than the site limit). The maximum size of each file is displayed to students at the point where they upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submission comments.jpg|thumb|Submission comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:maximum file size.jpg|thumb|Maximum file size]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Feedback types==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedbacktypes.png|Feedback types]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this to yes means that markers can leave feedback comments for each submission. It enables the Feedback Comments column in the grading table.(To access the grading table, click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback comments are also accessible by clicking on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback comments.jpg|thumb|The Feedback comments column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FIle:feedback comments 2.jpg|thumb|Type feedback comments into the box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to yes, the teacher will have a link to download the grading list as a spreadsheet. They will then be able to enter grades and feedback comments offline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:emptygradebook.png|thumb|The empty gradebook on Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:downloadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|The dropdown to download the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:excelgrades.png|thumb|Editing the grades offline]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher has completed their grading offline, they can then upload the spreadsheet, confirm the changes and the grades and comments will be transferred over into Moodle&#039;s gradebook:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:uploadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|Uploading the grading worksheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:confirmchanges.png|thumb|Confirming the changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fullgradebook.png|thumb|Grades and feedback transferred into Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/11/19/offline-grading-worksheet-in-moodle-2-4-assignment/ Offline grading worksheet] blog post by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows  markers to upload files with feedback when marking. These files may be the marked up student assignments, documents with comments, a completed marking guide, or spoken audio feedback. It enables the Feedback Files column in the grading table. (To access the  grading table click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;)To upload feedback files, click on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table and then upload either with drag and drop or using the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback is displayed to students on the assignment submission page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files.jpg|thumb|The Feedback files column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files 2.jpg|thumb|Upload files here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback view for students.jpg|thumb|Student view with comments and file feedback both enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Uploading multiple feedback files====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to upload multiple feedback files as a zip, from the dropdown above the grading list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the students&#039; assignments using the &amp;quot;Download all submissions&amp;quot; link from the same dropdown menu;&lt;br /&gt;
#Extract the folder offline and add your comments to the student&#039;s submissions.Keep the names the same.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the students&#039; submissions and zip them into a new folder. Important: Don&#039;t just edit them inside their original folder and re-zip this; it will not work. The folder name does not matter as long as the feedback files have the same names as before.&lt;br /&gt;
#Upload this newly zipped folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be presented with a confirmation screen displaying your feedback files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:mutiplefeedbackzip.png|thumb|Choose from the dropdown menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip1.png|thumb|Confirmation screen displaying the feedback files to be uploaded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip2.png|thumb|Screen confirming uploaded feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you zip files on a Mac, you may get a folder included in the zip called _MACOSX_ which needs to be removed otherwise moodle will not recognise the changes in the files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionsettings.png|Submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Require students click submit button===&lt;br /&gt;
Students can upload draft versions of the assignment until such time as they are ready to submit.Once they click the submit button they indicate to the teacher that they have finished working on the assignment. In earlier versions of Moodle this was called &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Send for marking&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can then longer edit their submission. If they need to change it, they must ask the teacher who can revert the assignment to draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To revert to the draft stage, click on the assignment activity and then View/Grade all Submissions. Locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Revert the submission to draft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No, then students do not have to to click a submit button and are able to make changes to uploaded files at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No but the teacher wishes to grade students work, then you can stop students from making further changes by using Prevent submission changes. Prevent submission changes can also be used in cases where students have neglected to click the Submit button and grading has commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent submission changes, click on the assignment activity, then click on the View/Grade all submissions button. On the grading table, locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Prevent submission changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:revert to draft.jpg|thumb|Reverting to draft]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prevent submission changes.jpg|thumb|Prevent submission changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:with selected.jpg|thumb|&amp;quot;With selected&amp;quot;..]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require that students accept the Submission statement===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can define a &amp;quot;Submission statement&amp;quot;, ie, a statement where students promise the work is their own and which they must agree to before submitting their work. This may be done via &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If preferred, the available default statement which may be used instead: &#039;&#039;This assignment is my own work, except where I have acknowledged the use of the works of other people&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has given teachers the option of using a submission statement or not, then it will be available in the assignment settings screen. The section [[#Submission_Statement]] explains how an administrator can set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this blog post [http://ourlearning.co.uk/2012/10/moodle-assignment-all-my-own-work/ &amp;quot;All my own work&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this setting is enabled, students will have to check a button before they can submit their assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has forced the statement throughout the site, a teacher will not have this option in the settings but a student will see the statement when accessing their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attempts reopened===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the teacher to decide how submissions are reopened. The default is &amp;quot;Never&amp;quot;, in that students may only submit once. However, a teacher can set this to &amp;quot;Manually&amp;quot; and reopen it themselves for the student to resubmit, or to &amp;quot;Automatically until pass&amp;quot;. The student must then keep trying and resubmitting until they get a pass grade. [[:en:Grade_items#Activity-based_grade_items|Passing grades]] are set in the Gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a student is allowed to resubmit, this setting will determine how many times they can resubmit before they are no longer allowed to do so. (For example, if a student has to keep trying until they get a pass grade, the teacher might decide that ten attempts is enough even though they have not yet passed!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsubmissionsettings.png|Group submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Students submit in groups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, then students are able to collaborate on an assignment. This might involve for example, working in the same online text area, or one student uploading an MS Powerpoint which another student downloads, improves and re-uploads to the common assignment area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grading, the teacher may choose to give a common grade and feedback to all students in the group or to give individual grades and feedback to each member.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no groups have been made, then Moodle will make a default group of every student in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details see this Youtube video [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G16gYZJFCrM&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Group Assignment 2.4]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require all group members submit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if the teacher has ticked the &amp;quot;Require students click submit button&amp;quot; earlier. The assignment will not be classed as &amp;quot;submitted&amp;quot; until all members of the group have made a contribution. When one student has submitted, the other members of the group will be able to see who still has to submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping for student groups===&lt;br /&gt;
If a particular grouping is selected here, then the gradebook will display any other groups and non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;, while naming the group(s) that are in the chosen grouping. If &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; is selected, then the gradebook will display the names of all groups and put any non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;. See this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=216399#p942913 forum post on grouping for student groups] for examples of how this might be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:notifications25.png|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose) whenever a student submits an assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about late submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose)whenever a student submits a late assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:grade25.png|Grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the maximum grade or [[Scales|Scale]] to be applied to the assignment.  If you will not be giving a grade for the assignment, choose No Grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading method===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Simple direct grading (entering a grade or scale item)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubric]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade Category===&lt;br /&gt;
Any custom [[Grade_categories|Grade Categories]] that have been created within your site or course will be listed here and will be available for selection.  Select the required Grade Category to add this assignment as a [[Grade_items|Grade item]] within this Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Blind marking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is enabled, then a teacher will not see the names of students who have submitted their assignments. Instead, they will see randomly generated Participant numbers. (The student view of the assignment does not change.) This is also the case if student comments have been enabled. Once they have graded the assignment, it is however possible for teachers to see who submitted what by clicking on &amp;quot;Reveal student identities&amp;quot; in the Assignment settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Returning Marks to Students ====&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the nature of blind marking, the students cannot see the final grade until all of the students names have been revealed.  This is found in Assignment Settings &amp;gt; Reveal Student Names.  However, feedback comments will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Beacuse of this, the  level of anonymity might not suit the privacy requirements of your establishment. See this tracker entry MDL-35390 - &amp;quot;Blind Marking is not so blind&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on this feature, see this Youtube video [http://youtu.be/Biiw3E13mgM Blind marking in 2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking workflow===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
When set to Yes, teachers will be able to specify the stage they are at in their grading of individual assignments (as in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflow.png|thumb|Marking workflow state in the individual grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26quickgradingworkflow.png|thumb|Dropdown to select marking workflow state when quick grading]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One advantage of using marking workflow is that the grades can be hidden from students until they are set to &#039;Released&#039;. The actual list of steps are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Not marked (the marker has not yet started) &lt;br /&gt;
* In marking (the marker has started but not yet finished) &lt;br /&gt;
* Marking completed (the marker has finished but might need to go back for checking/corrections) &lt;br /&gt;
* In review (the marking is now with the teacher in charge for quality checking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Ready for release (the teacher in charge is satisfied with the marking but wait before giving students access to the marking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Released (the student can access the grades/feedback)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example use cases====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One marker, Marker, wants to release all grades at the same time &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple markers, &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking allocation===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If marking workflow (see above) is set to Yes, it is possible to enable marking allocation. This means that teachers can be selected to grade or review the submitted work of specific students. Colleagues can monitor progress through the displayed marking workflow states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflowallocatedmarkers.png|thumb|Allocated markers on the grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access settings==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Restrict_access_settings|Restrict access]] area becomes visible in Moodle activities and resource settings if [[Conditional_activities|Conditional Activities]] have been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity. See the Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=98208 Custom role for &#039;Course Monitor&#039;] forum discussion for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assignment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:exportownsubmission|Export own submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:grade|Grade assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:submit|Submit assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:view|View assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment settings===&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback plugin====&lt;br /&gt;
The comments that are pushed to the gradebook from the assignment are limited to a single text only comment. An Administrator can specify which of the feedback plugins will be push comments to the gradebook. On a standard Moodle install the choices are &amp;quot;Feedback comments&amp;quot; (default) or &amp;quot;Feedback file&amp;quot; but there may be additional options if your Moodle install contains additional feedback plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show recent submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows everyone to see notifications of submissions in [[Recent activity]] reports and the Recent Activity Block, within a course context.  Note that the default for this option is No which means students will not be able to see when classmates have submitted or updated any Assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Send submission receipt to students====&lt;br /&gt;
This switch will enable submission receipts for students. Students will receive a notification every time they successfully submit an assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ass_settings.jpg|thumb|350px|Submission receipts settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission Statement====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enter text in the box here which will appear when students are about to submit their assignment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:newsubmissionstatement.png|thumb|Admin view of Submission statement set up screen - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionstatement.png|thumb|Student view when about to submit - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is left as the default &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then teachers will have the choice within their own assignments to force this or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default assignment settings====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify here the default assignment settings which may be set as &#039;Advanced&#039; (ie, they will appear when clicking &#039;Show more&#039;) or &#039;Locked&#039; (ie the teacher cannot change them.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26assignmentdefaults.png|thumb|Default, Advanced and Locked checkboxes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment submission plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular submission plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====File submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum submission size&#039;&#039;&#039; An Administrator can specify the maximum size of any individual file uploaded within the assignment module across all courses on the site. This limit may be equal to or less than course file upload limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Online text submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, students will be able to send a message to their teacher when submitting their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment feedback plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular feedback plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
====Annotate pdf====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can upload stamps for teachers to use when annotating student pdfs.  You can also check the ghostscript path:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_116.png|thumb|Ghostscript not installed or incorrectly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_115.png|thumb|Ghostscript correctly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the default stamps are deleted by accident, they can be found in mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/pix and re-uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this will be enabled by default for all new assignments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Synergy Learning blog post: [http://www.synergy-learning.com/moodle-2-5-improvements-assignment-resubmissions/ Assignment resubmissions]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aufgabe konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un devoir]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:課題を追加/編集する]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de tarea]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_security_procedures&amp;diff=110344</id>
		<title>Moodle security procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_security_procedures&amp;diff=110344"/>
		<updated>2014-02-26T08:20:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding link to security development process&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We treat  security issues in Moodle software very seriously. Even though we dedicate a lot of time designing our code to avoid such problems, it is inevitable in a project of this size that new vulnerabilities will occasionally be discovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Disclosure policy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We practice &#039;&#039;responsible disclosure&#039;&#039;, which means we have a policy of disclosing all security issues that come to our attention, but only after we have solved the issue and given registered Moodle sites time to upgrade or patch their installations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We ask that when reporting a security issue, you observe these same guidelines, and beyond communicating with the security team, do not share your knowledge of security issues with the public at large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I report a  security issue?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please &amp;quot;[http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/CreateIssue.jspa Create a new issue]&amp;quot; in the Moodle tracker describing the problem (and solution if possible) in detail. Make sure you set the security level accurately to make sure that the security team sees it. Bugs classified as a &amp;quot;Serious security issue&amp;quot; are hidden from everyone apart from the security team and the person who reported the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are not sure whether an issue is a security issue, you should still create a new issue in the tracker for review, using the security level &amp;quot;Could be a security issue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please do &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; post about security issues in the forums on moodle.org or elsewhere. This will cause the issue to be more widely known before a fix can be prepared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How we deal with a reported security issue==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The security team reviews the issue and evaluates its potential impact on all supported versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
# The security team works with the issue reporter to resolve the problem, keeping details of the problem and its solution hidden until a release is made.&lt;br /&gt;
# New versions are created and tested.&lt;br /&gt;
# New packages are created and made available on download.moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
# Advisories are mailed to administrators of registered Moodle sites, giving a period of time when they can upgrade before the issue becomes public.&lt;br /&gt;
# A public announcement is made about the security issue in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7128 Moodle security news forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also...==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:Process#Security_issues|Security issue development process]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sicherheitsprozeduren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=109980</id>
		<title>Assignment settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=109980"/>
		<updated>2014-02-17T01:14:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding link to passing grades settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Assignment}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This page describes settings for the new Assignment module in Moodle 2.3 onwards. For documentation on Assignments (2.2) settings, see [https://docs.moodle.org/22/en/Assignment_settings Assignment settings] in the 2.2 docs.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing an Assignment activity==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new Assignment activity to your course, login with the appropriate access rights (e.g.editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Within the required Week or Topic Block click Add and Activity or Resource link. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the Add an activity or resource dialogue box that appears, select Assignment and click Add.&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit an existing Assignment activity, login to your course with the appropriate access rights (e.g. editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Select the Update icon against the relevant Assignment item.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, after logging into your course simply click on the name of the Assignment activity you wish to edit and then click the Edit Settings link under Assignment administration within the Settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available when creating or editing/updating any Assignment activity. Only General,Availability and Submission types are open by default;the others are collapsed. To expand everything, click the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right. &lt;br /&gt;
Click on any screenshot to see it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General ==&lt;br /&gt;
The General section allows you to give your assignment a name and description. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:assignmentgeneral26.png|General settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment name===&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Assignment a name (e.g. “Report on Topic 1 Content”). The title entered here will be the name that learners see in the course content area. Learners will click on this name to view the details of the assignment and, if applicable, submit their work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. &lt;br /&gt;
Click the icon on the left to expand the toolbar and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also provide information or resources related to the assignment, such as a video clip, an image, or a link to a webpage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the assignment activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:AssignAvailability.png|thumb|450px|Availability settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Allow submissions from===&lt;br /&gt;
The Allow submissions from setting prevents students from submitting their assignment before the shown date. A teacher can to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) from which learners can begin to submit their assignments. Please note that this setting does not hide the activity from the learners. Instead, the learner will see the activity, be able to view the instructions and use any materials you have included in the description, but the learner will not be able to submit or complete the assignment until the Allow submissions from date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is enabled (ticked/checked) by default and is set at the day and time you added the assignment. To disable this, remove the tick/check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Due date===&lt;br /&gt;
The Due date setting establishes when the assignment is due. Submissions will still be allowed after this date, but any assignments submitted after this date are marked as late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows an teacher to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) before which learners must submit their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the Due date is Enabled (ticked) and is set at 7 days ahead of the day and time you selected Add Assignment. To disable this feature, simply ensure the Enable checkbox is not marked. For more information on using the Due Date see Assignment FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Assignments without a Due date will appear on the My home page with “No Due date” displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cut-off date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cut-off date is the date beyond which students will not be able to send in their assignment as the button for doing so will no longer be displayed. After that date (or time) a teacher may, on request, grant an extension by going to the class assignment grading screen, clicking the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; column and choosing &amp;quot;grant extension&amp;quot; for the relevant student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this Youtube screencast [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaL0LzZwyYI&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Assignment Extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Always show description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is used in conjunction with the Allow submissions from setting. If it is set to Yes, the assignment Description will become visible to students at the Allow submissions from date. If it is set to No, the assignment Description will be hidden from students until the Allow submissions from date, only the assignment Name will be displayed as shown in the screenshot below. (Click to see full size.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:alwaysshowdescription.png|thumb|450px|Always show description]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Allow submissions from is disabled, then this setting has no meaning: the assignment description will always be visible to students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26submissioncomments.png|thumb|450px|Select the type of submission here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide how you wish students to submit their work to you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if Submission comments are enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment&amp;gt;Submission plugins&#039;&#039; then students will be able to add a note to their teacher on submitting work. If Blind marking is enabled, student comments display as from &amp;quot;Participant 01 etc&amp;quot; to avoid revealing identities. These comments will appear in the grading table in the Submission comments column.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Online text===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can type their response directly in Moodle using the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can upload and edit one or more files of any type the teacher can  open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the student uploads a pdf file, the teacher can annotate it within the browser, and on saving, the annotated file is made available to the student. See section 5.3.1 Annotating pdfs in [[Using Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This requires Ghostscript to be enabled on the server. This can be checked in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignments&amp;gt;Feedback plugins&amp;gt;Annotate pdf&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of uploaded files===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the maximum number of files which may be uploaded by each learner. (It might be helpful to display the number in the assignment description.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum submission size===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting specifies the maximum size per file of each of the files that the students can upload as part of their submission. This maximum upload size may only be equal to or less than the course limit (which in turn may only be equal to or less than the site limit). The maximum size of each file is displayed to students at the point where they upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submission comments.jpg|thumb|Submission comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:maximum file size.jpg|thumb|Maximum file size]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Feedback types==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedbacktypes.png|Feedback types]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this to yes means that markers can leave feedback comments for each submission. It enables the Feedback Comments column in the grading table.(To access the grading table, click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback comments are also accessible by clicking on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback comments.jpg|thumb|The Feedback comments column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FIle:feedback comments 2.jpg|thumb|Type feedback comments into the box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to yes, the teacher will have a link to download the grading list as a spreadsheet. They will then be able to enter grades and feedback comments offline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:emptygradebook.png|thumb|The empty gradebook on Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:downloadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|The dropdown to download the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:excelgrades.png|thumb|Editing the grades offline]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher has completed their grading offline, they can then upload the spreadsheet, confirm the changes and the grades and comments will be transferred over into Moodle&#039;s gradebook:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:uploadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|Uploading the grading worksheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:confirmchanges.png|thumb|Confirming the changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fullgradebook.png|thumb|Grades and feedback transferred into Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/11/19/offline-grading-worksheet-in-moodle-2-4-assignment/ Offline grading worksheet] blog post by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows  markers to upload files with feedback when marking. These files may be the marked up student assignments, documents with comments, a completed marking guide, or spoken audio feedback. It enables the Feedback Files column in the grading table. (To access the  grading table click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;)To upload feedback files, click on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table and then upload either with drag and drop or using the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback is displayed to students on the assignment submission page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files.jpg|thumb|The Feedback files column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files 2.jpg|thumb|Upload files here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback view for students.jpg|thumb|Student view with comments and file feedback both enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Uploading multiple feedback files====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to upload multiple feedback files as a zip, from the dropdown above the grading list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the students&#039; assignments using the &amp;quot;Download all submissions&amp;quot; link from the same dropdown menu;&lt;br /&gt;
#Extract the folder offline and add your comments to the student&#039;s submissions.Keep the names the same.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the students&#039; submissions and zip them into a new folder. Important: Don&#039;t just edit them inside their original folder and re-zip this; it will not work. The folder name does not matter as long as the feedback files have the same names as before.&lt;br /&gt;
#Upload this newly zipped folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be presented with a confirmation screen displaying your feedback files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:mutiplefeedbackzip.png|thumb|Choose from the dropdown menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip1.png|thumb|Confirmation screen displaying the feedback files to be uploaded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip2.png|thumb|Screen confirming uploaded feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you zip files on a Mac, you may get a folder included in the zip called _MACOSX_ which needs to be removed otherwise moodle will not recognise the changes in the files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionsettings.png|Submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Require students click submit button===&lt;br /&gt;
Students can upload draft versions of the assignment until such time as they are ready to submit.Once they click the submit button they indicate to the teacher that they have finished working on the assignment. In earlier versions of Moodle this was called &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Send for marking&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can then longer edit their submission. If they need to change it, they must ask the teacher who can revert the assignment to draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To revert to the draft stage, click on the assignment activity and then View/Grade all Submissions. Locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Revert the submission to draft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No, then students do not have to to click a submit button and are able to make changes to uploaded files at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No but the teacher wishes to grade students work, then you can stop students from making further changes by using Prevent submission changes. Prevent submission changes can also be used in cases where students have neglected to click the Submit button and grading has commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent submission changes, click on the assignment activity, then click on the View/Grade all submissions button. On the grading table, locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Prevent submission changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:revert to draft.jpg|thumb|Reverting to draft]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prevent submission changes.jpg|thumb|Prevent submission changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:with selected.jpg|thumb|&amp;quot;With selected&amp;quot;..]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require that students accept the Submission statement===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can define a &amp;quot;Submission statement&amp;quot;, ie, a statement where students promise the work is their own and which they must agree to before submitting their work. This may be done via &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If preferred, the available default statement which may be used instead: &#039;&#039;This assignment is my own work, except where I have acknowledged the use of the works of other people&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has given teachers the option of using a submission statement or not, then it will be available in the assignment settings screen. The section [[#Submission_Statement]] explains how an administrator can set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this blog post [http://ourlearning.co.uk/2012/10/moodle-assignment-all-my-own-work/ &amp;quot;All my own work&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this setting is enabled, students will have to check a button before they can submit their assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has forced the statement throughout the site, a teacher will not have this option in the settings but a student will see the statement when accessing their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attempts reopened===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the teacher to decide how submissions are reopened. The default is &amp;quot;Never&amp;quot;, in that students may only submit once. However, a teacher can set this to &amp;quot;Manually&amp;quot; and reopen it themselves for the student to resubmit, or to &amp;quot;Automatically until pass&amp;quot;. The student must then keep trying and resubmitting until they get a pass grade. [[Grade_items#Activity-based_grade_items|Passing grades]] are set in the Gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a student is allowed to resubmit, this setting will determine how many times they can resubmit before they are no longer allowed to do so. (For example, if a student has to keep trying until they get a pass grade, the teacher might decide that ten attempts is enough even though they have not yet passed!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsubmissionsettings.png|Group submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Students submit in groups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, then students are able to collaborate on an assignment. This might involve for example, working in the same online text area, or one student uploading an MS Powerpoint which another student downloads, improves and re-uploads to the common assignment area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grading, the teacher may choose to give a common grade and feedback to all students in the group or to give individual grades and feedback to each member.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no groups have been made, then Moodle will make a default group of every student in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details see this Youtube video [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G16gYZJFCrM&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Group Assignment 2.4]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require all group members submit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if the teacher has ticked the &amp;quot;Require students click submit button&amp;quot; earlier. The assignment will not be classed as &amp;quot;submitted&amp;quot; until all members of the group have made a contribution. When one student has submitted, the other members of the group will be able to see who still has to submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping for student groups===&lt;br /&gt;
If a particular grouping is selected here, then the gradebook will display any other groups and non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;, while naming the group(s) that are in the chosen grouping. If &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; is selected, then the gradebook will display the names of all groups and put any non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;. See this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=216399#p942913 forum post on grouping for student groups] for examples of how this might be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:notifications25.png|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose) whenever a student submits an assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about late submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose)whenever a student submits a late assignment.  Please note if you are using the assignment in Groups Mode (eg Separate or Visible Groups), the teacher will need to be a member of the group in order to receive the submission notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:grade25.png|Grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the maximum grade or [[Scales|Scale]] to be applied to the assignment.  If you will not be giving a grade for the assignment, choose No Grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading method===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Simple direct grading (entering a grade or scale item)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubric]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade Category===&lt;br /&gt;
Any custom [[Grade_categories|Grade Categories]] that have been created within your site or course will be listed here and will be available for selection.  Select the required Grade Category to add this assignment as a [[Grade_items|Grade item]] within this Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Blind marking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is enabled, then a teacher will not see the names of students who have submitted their assignments. Instead, they will see randomly generated Participant numbers. (The student view of the assignment does not change.) This is also the case if student comments have been enabled. Once they have graded the assignment, it is however possible for teachers to see who submitted what by clicking on &amp;quot;Reveal student identities&amp;quot; in the Assignment settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Returning Marks to Students ====&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the nature of blind marking, the students cannot see the final grade until all of the students names have been revealed.  This is found in Assignment Settings &amp;gt; Reveal Student Names.  However, feedback comments will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Beacuse of this, the  level of anonymity might not suit the privacy requirements of your establishment. See this tracker entry MDL-35390 - &amp;quot;Blind Marking is not so blind&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on this feature, see this Youtube video [http://youtu.be/Biiw3E13mgM Blind marking in 2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking workflow===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
When set to Yes, teachers will be able to specify the stage they are at in their grading of individual assignments (as in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflow.png|thumb|Marking workflow state in the individual grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26quickgradingworkflow.png|thumb|Dropdown to select marking workflow state when quick grading]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One advantage of using marking workflow is that the grades can be hidden from students until they are set to &#039;Released&#039;. The actual list of steps are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Not marked (the marker has not yet started) &lt;br /&gt;
* In marking (the marker has started but not yet finished) &lt;br /&gt;
* Marking completed (the marker has finished but might need to go back for checking/corrections) &lt;br /&gt;
* In review (the marking is now with the teacher in charge for quality checking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Ready for release (the teacher in charge is satisfied with the marking but wait before giving students access to the marking) &lt;br /&gt;
* Released (the student can access the grades/feedback)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example use cases====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One marker, Marker, wants to release all grades at the same time &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple markers, &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker enables &amp;quot;Use marking workflow&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker marks each submission and transitions the grading to &amp;quot;Marking completed&amp;quot; as each submission is graded. &lt;br /&gt;
* Marker then uses the batch operations to transition all grades to &amp;quot;Released&amp;quot; at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use marking allocation===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If marking workflow (see above) is set to Yes, it is possible to enable marking allocation. This means that teachers can be selected to grade or review the submitted work of specific students. Colleagues can monitor progress through the displayed marking workflow states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26markingworkflowallocatedmarkers.png|thumb|Allocated markers on the grading screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access settings==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Restrict_access_settings|Restrict access]] area becomes visible in Moodle activities and resource settings if [[Conditional_activities|Conditional Activities]] have been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity. See the Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=98208 Custom role for &#039;Course Monitor&#039;] forum discussion for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assignment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:exportownsubmission|Export own submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:grade|Grade assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:submit|Submit assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:view|View assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment settings===&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback plugin====&lt;br /&gt;
The comments that are pushed to the gradebook from the assignment are limited to a single text only comment. An Administrator can specify which of the feedback plugins will be push comments to the gradebook. On a standard Moodle install the choices are &amp;quot;Feedback comments&amp;quot; (default) or &amp;quot;Feedback file&amp;quot; but there may be additional options if your Moodle install contains additional feedback plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Show recent submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows everyone to see notifications of submissions in [[Recent activity]] reports and the Recent Activity Block, within a course context.  Note that the default for this option is No which means students will not be able to see when classmates have submitted or updated any Assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Send submission receipt to students====&lt;br /&gt;
This switch will enable submission receipts for students. Students will receive a notification every time they successfully submit an assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ass_settings.jpg|thumb|350px|Submission receipts settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission Statement====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enter text in the box here which will appear when students are about to submit their assignment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:newsubmissionstatement.png|thumb|Admin view of Submission statement set up screen - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionstatement.png|thumb|Student view when about to submit - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is left as the default &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then teachers will have the choice within their own assignments to force this or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default assignment settings====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify here the default assignment settings which may be set as &#039;Advanced&#039; (ie, they will appear when clicking &#039;Show more&#039;) or &#039;Locked&#039; (ie the teacher cannot change them.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26assignmentdefaults.png|thumb|Default, Advanced and Locked checkboxes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment submission plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular submission plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====File submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum submission size&#039;&#039;&#039; An Administrator can specify the maximum size of any individual file uploaded within the assignment module across all courses on the site. This limit may be equal to or less than course file upload limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Online text submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, students will be able to send a message to their teacher when submitting their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Manage assignment feedback plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can change the order, check the settings or uninstall a particular feedback plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
====Annotate pdf====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can upload stamps for teachers to use when annotating student pdfs.  You can also check the ghostscript path:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_116.png|thumb|Ghostscript not installed or incorrectly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Selection_115.png|thumb|Ghostscript correctly installed]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the default stamps are deleted by accident, they can be found in mod/assign/feedback/editpdf/pix and re-uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this will be enabled by default for all new assignments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Synergy Learning blog post: [http://www.synergy-learning.com/moodle-2-5-improvements-assignment-resubmissions/ Assignment resubmissions]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aufgabe konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un devoir]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:課題を追加/編集する]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de tarea]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=OPcache&amp;diff=107917</id>
		<title>OPcache</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=OPcache&amp;diff=107917"/>
		<updated>2013-11-21T07:34:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding details for IIS&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Environment}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The standard OPcache extension is strongly recommended; since Moodle 2.6, it is the only solution officially supported by PHP developers. The benefits are increased performance and significantly lower memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OPcache extension is distributed as part of PHP 5.5.0 and later. It is available also for older stable PHP releases from PECL under the original name ZendOPcache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PHP.ini settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code ini&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[opcache]&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.enable = 1&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.memory_consumption = 128&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.max_accelerated_files = 4000&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.revalidate_freq = 60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Required for Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.use_cwd = 1&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.validate_timestamps = 1&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.save_comments = 1&lt;br /&gt;
opcache.enable_file_override = 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; If something does not work in Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
;opcache.revalidate_path = 1 ; May fix problems with include paths&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Experimental for Moodle 2.6 and later&lt;br /&gt;
;opcache.fast_shutdown = 1&lt;br /&gt;
;opcache.enable_cli = 1 ; Speeds up CLI cron&lt;br /&gt;
;opcache.load_comments = 0 ; May lower memory use, might not be compatible with add-ons and other apps.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using IIS you will need PHP 5.5 and you will need to add the extension for opcache under the &#039;&#039;ExtensionList&#039;&#039; section of the php.ini file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code ini&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[ExtensionList]&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
zend_extension=php_opcache.dll&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://pecl.php.net/package/ZendOpcache PECL ZendOPcache]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Environment]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:OPcache]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106592</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106592"/>
		<updated>2013-09-12T08:19:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding new acknowledgements&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ordering can be done by times/deadlines or by the ordering of activities in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Overview_of_students.png|thumb|right|The overview page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* There is an overview page allowing teachers to see the progress of all students in a class, which is helpful for finding students at risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d43KVlMBmLA &amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
** Petras Virzintas for contributing queries for Turnitin support&lt;br /&gt;
** Willian Mano for helping with the modern look CSS&lt;br /&gt;
** Matthieu Rolland for contributing queries for the Questionnaire module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106591</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106591"/>
		<updated>2013-09-12T08:18:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Updating screenshots&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ordering can be done by times/deadlines or by the ordering of activities in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Overview_of_students.png|thumb|right|The overview page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* There is an overview page allowing teachers to see the progress of all students in a class, which is helpful for finding students at risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d43KVlMBmLA &amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
** Petras Virzintas for contributing queries for Turnitin support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Overview_of_students.png&amp;diff=106590</id>
		<title>Plik:Overview of students.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Overview_of_students.png&amp;diff=106590"/>
		<updated>2013-09-12T08:17:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png&amp;diff=106589</id>
		<title>Plik:Bar in block - with details.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Bar_in_block_-_with_details.png&amp;diff=106589"/>
		<updated>2013-09-12T08:16:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Course_search&amp;diff=106326</id>
		<title>Course search</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Course_search&amp;diff=106326"/>
		<updated>2013-08-09T03:09:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Created page with &amp;quot;Placeholder&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Placeholder&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106309</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=106309"/>
		<updated>2013-08-08T02:32:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ProgressBar.gif|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ordering can be done by times/deadlines or by the ordering of activities in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is an overview page allowing teachers to see the progress of all students in a class, which is helpful for finding students at risk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d43KVlMBmLA &amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
** Petras Virzintas for contributing queries for Turnitin support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=105600</id>
		<title>Installing MSSQL for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=105600"/>
		<updated>2013-06-12T03:26:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Installation overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This short manual is suitable if you are trying to run Moodle using the SQL*Server (MSSQL) RDBMS. Steps detailed below must be performed &#039;&#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039;&#039; installing Moodle itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of this may also apply if you wish to access an MSSQL server for external db authentication/enrollment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all, minimum required version of MSSQL has been stabilised to MSSQL 2005 (v.9), although it &#039;&#039;&#039;might work with MSSQL 2000 (v.8) or newer&#039;&#039;&#039;. All the development process has been performed using MSSQL 2005 and there could be some &#039;&#039;&#039;unknown problems&#039;&#039;&#039; with previous releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While PHP comes with one, more or less, standard extension (mssql) that provides access to MSSQL databases, early we found some hard limits on it. Basically such default extension has some limits that prevent us to use it at all (you can find more info about these problems [[Development:XMLDB problems#MSSQL, PHP, UTF-8 and UCS-2|here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to allow PHP (i.e. Moodle) to access to MSSQL DBs properly we have to install a &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; to save us from the problems related above. See the sections below for details about the various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Get MSSQL Server installed and running. ([http://www.microsoft.com/sql/editions/express/default.mspx A free limited version, SQL Server Express Edition] is available for testing.)&lt;br /&gt;
:Make sure that you choose mixed authentication (Windows and local accounts) to keep things simpler later.  You&#039;ll be asked to define the  &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account password (it&#039;s the default System Administrator account which has full access to all databases by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure MS SQL Server can accept incoming TCP/IP connections on port 1433 (the standard one).&lt;br /&gt;
:You might need to explicitly allow this in your Windows firewall (see the Control Panel).  You may also need to edit options in the :&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Server Configuration Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Network Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Protocols&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;TCP/IP enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open the &amp;quot;SQL Server Management Studio&amp;quot; and create a new empty database.  If you are using the &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account then you don&#039;t need to do anything else here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Use a case sensitive collation, such as Latin1_General_CS_AS.&lt;br /&gt;
:*ANSI NULLS Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET ANSI_NULLS ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Quoted Identifiers Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:* (Moodle 2.x only) Row Versioning Enabled (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:** This is not settable via the DB properties. To set READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT, there must be no active connections to the database except for the connection executing the ALTER command. If you are viewing the DB in the Server Management Studio, disconnect from any servers in the &amp;quot;Object Explorer&amp;quot; (right-click &amp;gt; Disconnect), then create a &amp;quot;New Query&amp;quot; and run the ALTER command. See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb522682.aspx for details.&lt;br /&gt;
:** If your DB name starts with a number, you may need to put quotes around the DB name in the query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Get PHP installed with a web server.   Unless you want to do it under IIS or some other way, the packages on the [http://download.moodle.org Moodle download page] are a good solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose one of the following specific sections for your server to install the &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; installed and running properly on your PHP box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Set the following settings in your php.ini file&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textlimit = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textsize = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. With all this properly configured, you can continue with a [[Installing Moodle|standard Moodle installation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Microsoft Drivers for SQL Server for PHP ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING: This driver has known problems and is therefore not suitable for any Moodle production servers.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 2008 Microsoft [http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/forums/en-US/sqldriverforphp/thread/a10e5202-9e41-4ff8-a33e-fbcc7b951be2/ released] a new SQL Server Driver for PHP. This is a PHP extension that allows PHP scripts to read and write data on Microsoft SQL Server databases and it overcomes the problems with the native SQL Server extension that was previously bundled with PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using [[IIS]] it is strongly recommended to use the official Microsoft PHP installer from http://php.iis.net/, it should include the latest version of necessary drivers and it also simplifies future upgrades and configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Windows servers with [[Apache]] see http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=20098.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Windows ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Important Note 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to some previous bugs it&#039;s highly recommendable to use PHP &amp;gt;= 5.2.6 and FreeTDS 0.82 + post-release patches ([http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 more info]).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your web server is on Windows, use &#039;&#039;&#039;php_dblib.dll&#039;&#039;&#039;. Despite the name, it&#039;s FreeTDS compiled for Windows. (Go to this page for information on [https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS Using FreeTDS for Unix].) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Originally we were using the DLLs available at [http://kromann.info/article.php?Id=11062598797760000 Frank Kromann&#039;s site], but they are outdated (using old versions of FreeTDS) and that has caused [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 some problems] in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, right now, the recommended way to use FreeTDS under Windows is to use PHP 5.2.x following the following instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Download the appropriate copy of php_dblib.dll from the list below, and save it into your /PHP/ext directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! PHP version !! [http://www.iis-aid.com/articles/my_word/difference_between_php_thread_safe_and_non_thread_safe_binaries Thread Safe]  !! FreeTDS version !! Download URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.2.x (vc6) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.3.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.4.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_ts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_TS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/vtger3 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_nts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_NTS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/nkg2j4 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |  Thanks to [http://remote-learner.net/ Remote-Learner]] (Moodle [http://moodle.com/partners/ Partner]) and specially to Bryan Williams, donating one Visual C++ 6.0 Pro license to Moodle. Thanks to Trevor Johnson and his builds of the dblib extensions. Thanks to Daniele, Doug, Luis, Sean and many others by their collaboration in MDL-14725. Thanks to Frediano Ziglio and James K. Lowden from [http://freetds.org freetds.org] by their support. Thanks to Alastair Hole by providing the PHP 5.3 builds of the libraries. Thanks to Enyby by providing the PHP 5.4 builds of the libraries. Thanks!&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(alternatively here you can find some [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|instructions to build those freetds extensions under win32]] yourself)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. FreeTDS requires the .NET Framework v1.1 to be installed.  You can [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=262d25e3-f589-4842-8157-034d1e7cf3a3&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en download it from the Microsoft website] along with its [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=a8f5654f-088e-40b2-bbdb-a83353618b38&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en service pack].  Alternatively, if you do not wish to install this framework, you can [http://kromann.info/ms-libs/msvcr71.dll download the required DLL] from Frank&#039;s site, and save it into your /PHP root directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Edit your /PHP/php.ini file and add this line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  extension=php_dblib.dll &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that any lines referring to the php_mssql.dll extension are DISABLED (commented out).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When the PHP engine loads the FreeTDS extension it needs to be passed certain infiormation in order to be able to connect to your Moodle database. To retrieve this information FreeTDS looks for a file called &#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; in the root folder of the server that PHP installed on (e.g. C:\).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; should have the following structure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to connect to a particular [http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa174516(SQL.80).aspx instance] of MSSQL you should specify the instance name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      instance = xxx (instance name, e.g. INST2)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure FreeTDS to look for the freetds.conf file in any directory that you want - you don&#039;t have to use C:\. To do this create a SYSTEM environment variable called &#039;&#039;&#039;FREETDS&#039;&#039;&#039; and point it to the directory where you have installed the freetds.conf file. If you do not set this environment variable FreeTDS will look for the freetds.conf file in the C:\ folder, which is the default. One possible benefit of setting the FREETDS environment variable and using a different installation directory for freetds.conf is that C:\ is very predictable to a hacker that knows anything about FreeTDS and that is the first place that he would look if he wanted to compromise your system. So, using a different installation directory would just make your system stronger. See the FreeTDS [http://www.freetds.org/userguide/envvar.htm Setting the environment variables] documentation for more information about this FREETDS environment variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|recompile]] the FreeTDS extension yourself and change the default location to your preferred location at compile time. Then it is not necessary to create any environment variable. You must just ensure that freetds.conf is in the same folder that you specify when you compile php_dblib.dll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MSSQL is usually installed with port 1433 as the default. However, if the port was changed on your server when you installed MSSQL then you need to specify the correct port number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Your Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039;&#039; should include lines like these:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbtype    = &#039;mssql&#039;;        // Required&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbhost    = &#039;localhost&#039;;      // assuming MS SQL is on the same server, otherwise use an IP&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbname    = &#039;moodle&#039;;         // or whatever you called the database you created&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbuser    = &#039;yourusername&#039;;   // I usually use the &#039;sa&#039; account (dbowner perms are enough)&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpass    = &#039;yourpassword&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpersist =  false;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;prefix    = &#039;mdl_&#039;;            //Prefix, you can change it, but NEVER leave it blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t have a config.php file yet, it can be generated as normal from the Moodle installer. Alternatively you can use the config-dist.php file that comes with the Moodle package to create your own config.php file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Restart or start your web server.  If Moodle still cannot communicate with the database server, please turn display_startup_errors to &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; in your /PHP/php.ini file, then restart the web server and check for any errors that may indicate incorrect DLL versions or missing dependencies.  These error reports, turned off by default in PHP, can be vital in locating a problem with new extension installations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Database conection test, try this PHP script, just put in a text file called test.php change (&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;) to suite your setup, and load from local host (http://localhost/test.php)...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
	$link = mssql_connect(&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
	if(!$link) {&lt;br /&gt;
		echo&#039;Could not connect&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
		die(&#039;Could not connect: &#039; . mssql_error());&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	echo&#039;Successful connection&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
	mssql_close($link);&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Install Moodle as usual.  Good luck!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you encounter some problems you can try:&lt;br /&gt;
*check that you have DotNet framework 1.1 installed (later version are installed on Vista, but you could need this specific one)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*enable TCP/IP for MSSQL: SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; Protocols for MSSQLSERVER -&amp;gt; TCP/IP (Enable) -&amp;gt; Properties -&amp;gt; Ip Addresses -&amp;gt; 127.0.0.1 (Active+Enable)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*make sure the SQL Server Browser service is running SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; SQL Server Services&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*if you are using SQL Server 2005 and you have the error &#039;&#039;4004: Unicode data in a Unicode-only collation or ntext data cannot be sent to clients using DB-Library (such as ISQL) or ODBC version 3.7 or earlier&#039;&#039;, try the ODBTP method (next chapter). The SQL Server complaining that it doesn&#039;t support pure Unicode via TDS or older versions of ODBC. Microsoft has deprecated DB-Library a long ago, in favor of ODBC, OLE DB, or SQL Native Client. Many new features of SQL 2005 aren&#039;t accessible via DB-Library so if you need them, you could have to switch away from tools based on TDS and DB-Library :(&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FreeTDS on Linux (on Ubuntu by compiling an mssql.so extension) ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a good read to [http://www.robert-gonzalez.com/2009/02/18/building-the-php-ms-sql-server-extension-from-source-on-ubuntu-810/ building a FreeTDS based mssql extension for apache on Ubuntu]. Do note that [http://www.freetds.org/news.html freeTDS] 0.91 was recently released, you can find latest versions [http://freetds.sourceforge.net/ here]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: the freetds.conf file you use should have &amp;quot;text size = 20971520&amp;quot; as mentioned in the FreeTDS on Windows section otherwise you might see sessions logging out or worse apache segmentation faults. Also see [[FreeTDS]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Debian Lenny ==&lt;br /&gt;
I found the following solution using:&lt;br /&gt;
* PHP Version 5.2.6-1+lenny9&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft SQL Server Enterprise Edition, version: 9.00.4053.00&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;apt-get install libsybdb5 freetds-common php5-sybase&lt;br /&gt;
/etc/init.d/apache2 restart&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the process, if all goes fine, you will find in the mssql section of phpinfo();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! MSSQL Support&lt;br /&gt;
! enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Library version &lt;br /&gt;
| FreeTDS &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once FreeTDS is correctly installed, don not forget to set it up following explanations in https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See Also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* FreeTDS for Windows is obsolete and too slow as of 2011. See: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=183987 Hardware and Performance Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Errors FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28 Installation problems forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Postgres for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Microsoft SQL Server Driver for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Oracle for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=105599</id>
		<title>Installing MSSQL for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=105599"/>
		<updated>2013-06-12T03:26:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding note about DB names on MSSQL queries.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This short manual is suitable if you are trying to run Moodle using the SQL*Server (MSSQL) RDBMS. Steps detailed below must be performed &#039;&#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039;&#039; installing Moodle itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of this may also apply if you wish to access an MSSQL server for external db authentication/enrollment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all, minimum required version of MSSQL has been stabilised to MSSQL 2005 (v.9), although it &#039;&#039;&#039;might work with MSSQL 2000 (v.8) or newer&#039;&#039;&#039;. All the development process has been performed using MSSQL 2005 and there could be some &#039;&#039;&#039;unknown problems&#039;&#039;&#039; with previous releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While PHP comes with one, more or less, standard extension (mssql) that provides access to MSSQL databases, early we found some hard limits on it. Basically such default extension has some limits that prevent us to use it at all (you can find more info about these problems [[Development:XMLDB problems#MSSQL, PHP, UTF-8 and UCS-2|here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to allow PHP (i.e. Moodle) to access to MSSQL DBs properly we have to install a &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; to save us from the problems related above. See the sections below for details about the various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Get MSSQL Server installed and running. ([http://www.microsoft.com/sql/editions/express/default.mspx A free limited version, SQL Server Express Edition] is available for testing.)&lt;br /&gt;
:Make sure that you choose mixed authentication (Windows and local accounts) to keep things simpler later.  You&#039;ll be asked to define the  &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account password (it&#039;s the default System Administrator account which has full access to all databases by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure MS SQL Server can accept incoming TCP/IP connections on port 1433 (the standard one).&lt;br /&gt;
:You might need to explicitly allow this in your Windows firewall (see the Control Panel).  You may also need to edit options in the :&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Server Configuration Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Network Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Protocols&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;TCP/IP enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open the &amp;quot;SQL Server Management Studio&amp;quot; and create a new empty database.  If you are using the &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account then you don&#039;t need to do anything else here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Use a case sensitive collation, such as Latin1_General_CS_AS.&lt;br /&gt;
:*ANSI NULLS Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET ANSI_NULLS ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Quoted Identifiers Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:* (Moodle 2.x only) Row Versioning Enabled (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:** This is not settable via the DB properties. To set READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT, there must be no active connections to the database except for the connection executing the ALTER command. If you are viewing the DB in the Server Management Studio, disconnect from any servers in the &amp;quot;Object Explorer&amp;quot; (right-click &amp;gt; Disconnect), then create a &amp;quot;New Query&amp;quot; and run the ALTER command. See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb522682.aspx for details.&lt;br /&gt;
** If your DB name starts with a number, you may need to put quotes around the DB name in the query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Get PHP installed with a web server.   Unless you want to do it under IIS or some other way, the packages on the [http://download.moodle.org Moodle download page] are a good solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose one of the following specific sections for your server to install the &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; installed and running properly on your PHP box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Set the following settings in your php.ini file&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textlimit = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textsize = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. With all this properly configured, you can continue with a [[Installing Moodle|standard Moodle installation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Microsoft Drivers for SQL Server for PHP ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING: This driver has known problems and is therefore not suitable for any Moodle production servers.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 2008 Microsoft [http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/forums/en-US/sqldriverforphp/thread/a10e5202-9e41-4ff8-a33e-fbcc7b951be2/ released] a new SQL Server Driver for PHP. This is a PHP extension that allows PHP scripts to read and write data on Microsoft SQL Server databases and it overcomes the problems with the native SQL Server extension that was previously bundled with PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using [[IIS]] it is strongly recommended to use the official Microsoft PHP installer from http://php.iis.net/, it should include the latest version of necessary drivers and it also simplifies future upgrades and configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Windows servers with [[Apache]] see http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=20098.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Windows ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Important Note 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to some previous bugs it&#039;s highly recommendable to use PHP &amp;gt;= 5.2.6 and FreeTDS 0.82 + post-release patches ([http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 more info]).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your web server is on Windows, use &#039;&#039;&#039;php_dblib.dll&#039;&#039;&#039;. Despite the name, it&#039;s FreeTDS compiled for Windows. (Go to this page for information on [https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS Using FreeTDS for Unix].) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Originally we were using the DLLs available at [http://kromann.info/article.php?Id=11062598797760000 Frank Kromann&#039;s site], but they are outdated (using old versions of FreeTDS) and that has caused [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 some problems] in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, right now, the recommended way to use FreeTDS under Windows is to use PHP 5.2.x following the following instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Download the appropriate copy of php_dblib.dll from the list below, and save it into your /PHP/ext directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! PHP version !! [http://www.iis-aid.com/articles/my_word/difference_between_php_thread_safe_and_non_thread_safe_binaries Thread Safe]  !! FreeTDS version !! Download URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.2.x (vc6) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.3.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.4.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_ts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_TS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/vtger3 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_nts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_NTS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/nkg2j4 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |  Thanks to [http://remote-learner.net/ Remote-Learner]] (Moodle [http://moodle.com/partners/ Partner]) and specially to Bryan Williams, donating one Visual C++ 6.0 Pro license to Moodle. Thanks to Trevor Johnson and his builds of the dblib extensions. Thanks to Daniele, Doug, Luis, Sean and many others by their collaboration in MDL-14725. Thanks to Frediano Ziglio and James K. Lowden from [http://freetds.org freetds.org] by their support. Thanks to Alastair Hole by providing the PHP 5.3 builds of the libraries. Thanks to Enyby by providing the PHP 5.4 builds of the libraries. Thanks!&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(alternatively here you can find some [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|instructions to build those freetds extensions under win32]] yourself)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. FreeTDS requires the .NET Framework v1.1 to be installed.  You can [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=262d25e3-f589-4842-8157-034d1e7cf3a3&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en download it from the Microsoft website] along with its [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=a8f5654f-088e-40b2-bbdb-a83353618b38&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en service pack].  Alternatively, if you do not wish to install this framework, you can [http://kromann.info/ms-libs/msvcr71.dll download the required DLL] from Frank&#039;s site, and save it into your /PHP root directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Edit your /PHP/php.ini file and add this line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  extension=php_dblib.dll &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that any lines referring to the php_mssql.dll extension are DISABLED (commented out).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When the PHP engine loads the FreeTDS extension it needs to be passed certain infiormation in order to be able to connect to your Moodle database. To retrieve this information FreeTDS looks for a file called &#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; in the root folder of the server that PHP installed on (e.g. C:\).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; should have the following structure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to connect to a particular [http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa174516(SQL.80).aspx instance] of MSSQL you should specify the instance name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      instance = xxx (instance name, e.g. INST2)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure FreeTDS to look for the freetds.conf file in any directory that you want - you don&#039;t have to use C:\. To do this create a SYSTEM environment variable called &#039;&#039;&#039;FREETDS&#039;&#039;&#039; and point it to the directory where you have installed the freetds.conf file. If you do not set this environment variable FreeTDS will look for the freetds.conf file in the C:\ folder, which is the default. One possible benefit of setting the FREETDS environment variable and using a different installation directory for freetds.conf is that C:\ is very predictable to a hacker that knows anything about FreeTDS and that is the first place that he would look if he wanted to compromise your system. So, using a different installation directory would just make your system stronger. See the FreeTDS [http://www.freetds.org/userguide/envvar.htm Setting the environment variables] documentation for more information about this FREETDS environment variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|recompile]] the FreeTDS extension yourself and change the default location to your preferred location at compile time. Then it is not necessary to create any environment variable. You must just ensure that freetds.conf is in the same folder that you specify when you compile php_dblib.dll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MSSQL is usually installed with port 1433 as the default. However, if the port was changed on your server when you installed MSSQL then you need to specify the correct port number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Your Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039;&#039; should include lines like these:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbtype    = &#039;mssql&#039;;        // Required&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbhost    = &#039;localhost&#039;;      // assuming MS SQL is on the same server, otherwise use an IP&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbname    = &#039;moodle&#039;;         // or whatever you called the database you created&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbuser    = &#039;yourusername&#039;;   // I usually use the &#039;sa&#039; account (dbowner perms are enough)&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpass    = &#039;yourpassword&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpersist =  false;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;prefix    = &#039;mdl_&#039;;            //Prefix, you can change it, but NEVER leave it blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t have a config.php file yet, it can be generated as normal from the Moodle installer. Alternatively you can use the config-dist.php file that comes with the Moodle package to create your own config.php file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Restart or start your web server.  If Moodle still cannot communicate with the database server, please turn display_startup_errors to &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; in your /PHP/php.ini file, then restart the web server and check for any errors that may indicate incorrect DLL versions or missing dependencies.  These error reports, turned off by default in PHP, can be vital in locating a problem with new extension installations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Database conection test, try this PHP script, just put in a text file called test.php change (&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;) to suite your setup, and load from local host (http://localhost/test.php)...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
	$link = mssql_connect(&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
	if(!$link) {&lt;br /&gt;
		echo&#039;Could not connect&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
		die(&#039;Could not connect: &#039; . mssql_error());&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	echo&#039;Successful connection&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
	mssql_close($link);&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Install Moodle as usual.  Good luck!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you encounter some problems you can try:&lt;br /&gt;
*check that you have DotNet framework 1.1 installed (later version are installed on Vista, but you could need this specific one)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*enable TCP/IP for MSSQL: SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; Protocols for MSSQLSERVER -&amp;gt; TCP/IP (Enable) -&amp;gt; Properties -&amp;gt; Ip Addresses -&amp;gt; 127.0.0.1 (Active+Enable)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*make sure the SQL Server Browser service is running SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; SQL Server Services&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*if you are using SQL Server 2005 and you have the error &#039;&#039;4004: Unicode data in a Unicode-only collation or ntext data cannot be sent to clients using DB-Library (such as ISQL) or ODBC version 3.7 or earlier&#039;&#039;, try the ODBTP method (next chapter). The SQL Server complaining that it doesn&#039;t support pure Unicode via TDS or older versions of ODBC. Microsoft has deprecated DB-Library a long ago, in favor of ODBC, OLE DB, or SQL Native Client. Many new features of SQL 2005 aren&#039;t accessible via DB-Library so if you need them, you could have to switch away from tools based on TDS and DB-Library :(&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FreeTDS on Linux (on Ubuntu by compiling an mssql.so extension) ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a good read to [http://www.robert-gonzalez.com/2009/02/18/building-the-php-ms-sql-server-extension-from-source-on-ubuntu-810/ building a FreeTDS based mssql extension for apache on Ubuntu]. Do note that [http://www.freetds.org/news.html freeTDS] 0.91 was recently released, you can find latest versions [http://freetds.sourceforge.net/ here]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: the freetds.conf file you use should have &amp;quot;text size = 20971520&amp;quot; as mentioned in the FreeTDS on Windows section otherwise you might see sessions logging out or worse apache segmentation faults. Also see [[FreeTDS]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Debian Lenny ==&lt;br /&gt;
I found the following solution using:&lt;br /&gt;
* PHP Version 5.2.6-1+lenny9&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft SQL Server Enterprise Edition, version: 9.00.4053.00&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;apt-get install libsybdb5 freetds-common php5-sybase&lt;br /&gt;
/etc/init.d/apache2 restart&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the process, if all goes fine, you will find in the mssql section of phpinfo();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! MSSQL Support&lt;br /&gt;
! enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Library version &lt;br /&gt;
| FreeTDS &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once FreeTDS is correctly installed, don not forget to set it up following explanations in https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See Also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* FreeTDS for Windows is obsolete and too slow as of 2011. See: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=183987 Hardware and Performance Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Errors FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28 Installation problems forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Postgres for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Microsoft SQL Server Driver for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Oracle for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=104678</id>
		<title>Installing MSSQL for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_MSSQL_for_PHP&amp;diff=104678"/>
		<updated>2013-05-02T09:40:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Makin&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This short manual is suitable if you are trying to run Moodle using the SQL*Server (MSSQL) RDBMS. Steps detailed below must be performed &#039;&#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039;&#039; installing Moodle itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of this may also apply if you wish to access an MSSQL server for external db authentication/enrollment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all, minimum required version of MSSQL has been stabilised to MSSQL 2005 (v.9), although it &#039;&#039;&#039;might work with MSSQL 2000 (v.8) or newer&#039;&#039;&#039;. All the development process has been performed using MSSQL 2005 and there could be some &#039;&#039;&#039;unknown problems&#039;&#039;&#039; with previous releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While PHP comes with one, more or less, standard extension (mssql) that provides access to MSSQL databases, early we found some hard limits on it. Basically such default extension has some limits that prevent us to use it at all (you can find more info about these problems [[Development:XMLDB problems#MSSQL, PHP, UTF-8 and UCS-2|here]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in order to allow PHP (i.e. Moodle) to access to MSSQL DBs properly we have to install a &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; to save us from the problems related above. See the sections below for details about the various options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Get MSSQL Server installed and running. ([http://www.microsoft.com/sql/editions/express/default.mspx A free limited version, SQL Server Express Edition] is available for testing.)&lt;br /&gt;
:Make sure that you choose mixed authentication (Windows and local accounts) to keep things simpler later.  You&#039;ll be asked to define the  &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account password (it&#039;s the default System Administrator account which has full access to all databases by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure MS SQL Server can accept incoming TCP/IP connections on port 1433 (the standard one).&lt;br /&gt;
:You might need to explicitly allow this in your Windows firewall (see the Control Panel).  You may also need to edit options in the :&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Server Configuration Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Network Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Protocols&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;TCP/IP enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Open the &amp;quot;SQL Server Management Studio&amp;quot; and create a new empty database.  If you are using the &amp;quot;sa&amp;quot; account then you don&#039;t need to do anything else here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
Configure these settings in your created (and still empty) database:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Use a case sensitive collation, such as Latin1_General_CS_AS.&lt;br /&gt;
:*ANSI NULLS Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET ANSI_NULLS ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Quoted Identifiers Enabled = true (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET QUOTED_IDENTIFIER ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:* (Moodle 2.x only) Row Versioning Enabled (ALTER DATABASE xxxx SET READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT ON)&lt;br /&gt;
:** This is not settable via the DB properties. To set READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT, there must be no active connections to the database except for the connection executing the ALTER command. If you are viewing the DB in the Server Management Studio, disconnect from any servers in the &amp;quot;Object Explorer&amp;quot; (right-click &amp;gt; Disconnect), then create a &amp;quot;New Query&amp;quot; and run the ALTER command. See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb522682.aspx for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Get PHP installed with a web server.   Unless you want to do it under IIS or some other way, the packages on the [http://download.moodle.org Moodle download page] are a good solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose one of the following specific sections for your server to install the &#039;&#039;&#039;mssql extension alternative&#039;&#039;&#039; installed and running properly on your PHP box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Set the following settings in your php.ini file&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textlimit = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
:* mssql.textsize = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. With all this properly configured, you can continue with a [[Installing Moodle|standard Moodle installation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Microsoft Drivers for SQL Server for PHP ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING: This driver has known problems and is therefore not suitable for any Moodle production servers.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 2008 Microsoft [http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/forums/en-US/sqldriverforphp/thread/a10e5202-9e41-4ff8-a33e-fbcc7b951be2/ released] a new SQL Server Driver for PHP. This is a PHP extension that allows PHP scripts to read and write data on Microsoft SQL Server databases and it overcomes the problems with the native SQL Server extension that was previously bundled with PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using [[IIS]] it is strongly recommended to use the official Microsoft PHP installer from http://php.iis.net/, it should include the latest version of necessary drivers and it also simplifies future upgrades and configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Windows servers with [[Apache]] see http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=20098.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Windows ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Important Note 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to some previous bugs it&#039;s highly recommendable to use PHP &amp;gt;= 5.2.6 and FreeTDS 0.82 + post-release patches ([http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 more info]).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your web server is on Windows, use &#039;&#039;&#039;php_dblib.dll&#039;&#039;&#039;. Despite the name, it&#039;s FreeTDS compiled for Windows. (Go to this page for information on [https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS Using FreeTDS for Unix].) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Originally we were using the DLLs available at [http://kromann.info/article.php?Id=11062598797760000 Frank Kromann&#039;s site], but they are outdated (using old versions of FreeTDS) and that has caused [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-14725 some problems] in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, right now, the recommended way to use FreeTDS under Windows is to use PHP 5.2.x following the following instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Download the appropriate copy of php_dblib.dll from the list below, and save it into your /PHP/ext directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! PHP version !! [http://www.iis-aid.com/articles/my_word/difference_between_php_thread_safe_and_non_thread_safe_binaries Thread Safe]  !! FreeTDS version !! Download URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.2.x (vc6) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090302 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php52/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.3.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_TS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20090904 patches || [http://download.moodle.org/download.php/dblib/php53/DBLIB_NOTS.zip Download!]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | PHP 5.4.x (vc9) || Yes || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_ts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_TS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/vtger3 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No || 0.82 + 20110906 patches || [http://inethub.olvi.net.ua/ftp/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/dblib_nts.zip Download!] [ftp://inethub.olvi.net.ua/pub/soft/programming/php/ms%20sql%20driver%20for%20%20php%205.4.10/DBLIB_NTS.zip FTP Download!] [http://www.sendspace.com/file/nkg2j4 Mirror]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |  Thanks to [http://remote-learner.net/ Remote-Learner]] (Moodle [http://moodle.com/partners/ Partner]) and specially to Bryan Williams, donating one Visual C++ 6.0 Pro license to Moodle. Thanks to Trevor Johnson and his builds of the dblib extensions. Thanks to Daniele, Doug, Luis, Sean and many others by their collaboration in MDL-14725. Thanks to Frediano Ziglio and James K. Lowden from [http://freetds.org freetds.org] by their support. Thanks to Alastair Hole by providing the PHP 5.3 builds of the libraries. Thanks to Enyby by providing the PHP 5.4 builds of the libraries. Thanks!&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(alternatively here you can find some [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|instructions to build those freetds extensions under win32]] yourself)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. FreeTDS requires the .NET Framework v1.1 to be installed.  You can [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=262d25e3-f589-4842-8157-034d1e7cf3a3&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en download it from the Microsoft website] along with its [http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=a8f5654f-088e-40b2-bbdb-a83353618b38&amp;amp;DisplayLang=en service pack].  Alternatively, if you do not wish to install this framework, you can [http://kromann.info/ms-libs/msvcr71.dll download the required DLL] from Frank&#039;s site, and save it into your /PHP root directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Edit your /PHP/php.ini file and add this line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  extension=php_dblib.dll &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that any lines referring to the php_mssql.dll extension are DISABLED (commented out).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When the PHP engine loads the FreeTDS extension it needs to be passed certain infiormation in order to be able to connect to your Moodle database. To retrieve this information FreeTDS looks for a file called &#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; in the root folder of the server that PHP installed on (e.g. C:\).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;freetds.conf&#039;&#039;&#039; should have the following structure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to connect to a particular [http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa174516(SQL.80).aspx instance] of MSSQL you should specify the instance name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  [global]&lt;br /&gt;
      host = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (host name or ip of the MSSQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
      instance = xxx (instance name, e.g. INST2)&lt;br /&gt;
      port = 1433&lt;br /&gt;
      client charset = UTF-8&lt;br /&gt;
      tds version = 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
      text size = 20971520&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure FreeTDS to look for the freetds.conf file in any directory that you want - you don&#039;t have to use C:\. To do this create a SYSTEM environment variable called &#039;&#039;&#039;FREETDS&#039;&#039;&#039; and point it to the directory where you have installed the freetds.conf file. If you do not set this environment variable FreeTDS will look for the freetds.conf file in the C:\ folder, which is the default. One possible benefit of setting the FREETDS environment variable and using a different installation directory for freetds.conf is that C:\ is very predictable to a hacker that knows anything about FreeTDS and that is the first place that he would look if he wanted to compromise your system. So, using a different installation directory would just make your system stronger. See the FreeTDS [http://www.freetds.org/userguide/envvar.htm Setting the environment variables] documentation for more information about this FREETDS environment variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can [[Development:Compiling FreeTDS under Windows|recompile]] the FreeTDS extension yourself and change the default location to your preferred location at compile time. Then it is not necessary to create any environment variable. You must just ensure that freetds.conf is in the same folder that you specify when you compile php_dblib.dll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MSSQL is usually installed with port 1433 as the default. However, if the port was changed on your server when you installed MSSQL then you need to specify the correct port number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Your Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039;&#039; should include lines like these:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbtype    = &#039;mssql&#039;;        // Required&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbhost    = &#039;localhost&#039;;      // assuming MS SQL is on the same server, otherwise use an IP&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbname    = &#039;moodle&#039;;         // or whatever you called the database you created&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbuser    = &#039;yourusername&#039;;   // I usually use the &#039;sa&#039; account (dbowner perms are enough)&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpass    = &#039;yourpassword&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;dbpersist =  false;&lt;br /&gt;
$CFG-&amp;gt;prefix    = &#039;mdl_&#039;;            //Prefix, you can change it, but NEVER leave it blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t have a config.php file yet, it can be generated as normal from the Moodle installer. Alternatively you can use the config-dist.php file that comes with the Moodle package to create your own config.php file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Restart or start your web server.  If Moodle still cannot communicate with the database server, please turn display_startup_errors to &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; in your /PHP/php.ini file, then restart the web server and check for any errors that may indicate incorrect DLL versions or missing dependencies.  These error reports, turned off by default in PHP, can be vital in locating a problem with new extension installations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Database conection test, try this PHP script, just put in a text file called test.php change (&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;) to suite your setup, and load from local host (http://localhost/test.php)...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
	$link = mssql_connect(&#039;localhost&#039;, &#039;db_user&#039;, &#039;db_password&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
	if(!$link) {&lt;br /&gt;
		echo&#039;Could not connect&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
		die(&#039;Could not connect: &#039; . mssql_error());&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
	echo&#039;Successful connection&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
	mssql_close($link);&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Install Moodle as usual.  Good luck!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you encounter some problems you can try:&lt;br /&gt;
*check that you have DotNet framework 1.1 installed (later version are installed on Vista, but you could need this specific one)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*enable TCP/IP for MSSQL: SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; Protocols for MSSQLSERVER -&amp;gt; TCP/IP (Enable) -&amp;gt; Properties -&amp;gt; Ip Addresses -&amp;gt; 127.0.0.1 (Active+Enable)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*make sure the SQL Server Browser service is running SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration -&amp;gt; SQL Server Services&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*if you are using SQL Server 2005 and you have the error &#039;&#039;4004: Unicode data in a Unicode-only collation or ntext data cannot be sent to clients using DB-Library (such as ISQL) or ODBC version 3.7 or earlier&#039;&#039;, try the ODBTP method (next chapter). The SQL Server complaining that it doesn&#039;t support pure Unicode via TDS or older versions of ODBC. Microsoft has deprecated DB-Library a long ago, in favor of ODBC, OLE DB, or SQL Native Client. Many new features of SQL 2005 aren&#039;t accessible via DB-Library so if you need them, you could have to switch away from tools based on TDS and DB-Library :(&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FreeTDS on Linux (on Ubuntu by compiling an mssql.so extension) ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a good read to [http://www.robert-gonzalez.com/2009/02/18/building-the-php-ms-sql-server-extension-from-source-on-ubuntu-810/ building a FreeTDS based mssql extension for apache on Ubuntu]. Do note that [http://www.freetds.org/news.html freeTDS] 0.91 was recently released, you can find latest versions [http://freetds.sourceforge.net/ here]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: the freetds.conf file you use should have &amp;quot;text size = 20971520&amp;quot; as mentioned in the FreeTDS on Windows section otherwise you might see sessions logging out or worse apache segmentation faults. Also see [[FreeTDS]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using FreeTDS on Debian Lenny ==&lt;br /&gt;
I found the following solution using:&lt;br /&gt;
* PHP Version 5.2.6-1+lenny9&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft SQL Server Enterprise Edition, version: 9.00.4053.00&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;apt-get install libsybdb5 freetds-common php5-sybase&lt;br /&gt;
/etc/init.d/apache2 restart&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the process, if all goes fine, you will find in the mssql section of phpinfo();&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! MSSQL Support&lt;br /&gt;
! enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Library version &lt;br /&gt;
| FreeTDS &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once FreeTDS is correctly installed, don not forget to set it up following explanations in https://docs.moodle.org/en/FreeTDS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See Also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* FreeTDS for Windows is obsolete and too slow as of 2011. See: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=183987 Hardware and Performance Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Errors FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28 Installation problems forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Postgres for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Microsoft SQL Server Driver for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Oracle for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_research&amp;diff=104659</id>
		<title>Moodle research</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_research&amp;diff=104659"/>
		<updated>2013-05-01T06:51:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding link to research.moodle.net&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{About Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;There site [http://research.moodle.net research.moodle.net] has been established as a point of contact for Moodle researchers. On that site there is a [http://research.moodle.net/mod/data/view.php?id=1 Moodle Reseach Collection] containing Moodle-related research publications.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A growing, community-contributed collection of research into LMS (Learning Management Systems) and particularly Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Moodle-specific research=&lt;br /&gt;
Academic, governmental, organisational research (mostly) involving Moodle (design, use, implementation...). Check [[Moodle research FAQ|here]] for details. &lt;br /&gt;
==Print (papers, reports, collections, theses...)==&lt;br /&gt;
*Al-Ajlan, A. &amp;amp; Zedan,H. (2008) [http://www.computer.org/portal/web/csdl/doi/10.1109/FTDCS.2008.22 Why Moodle] 12th IEEE International Workshop on Future Trends of Distributed Computing Systems, 2008&lt;br /&gt;
*Alier, M., Casany, J., Casado, P. (2007) [http://74.125.155.132/scholar?q=cache:9f3NRhHqyDMJ:scholar.google.com/+moodle&amp;amp;hl=en&amp;amp;as_sdt=0,5 Mobile Extension Of A Web Based Moodle Virtual Classroom]. Proceedings of E-Challenges Conference, 2007.&lt;br /&gt;
*Al Naddabi, Z. (2007). [http://www.editlib.org/p/26540 A Moodle Course: Design and Implementation in English for Academic Purposes Instruction]. In T. Bastiaens &amp;amp; S. Carliner (Eds.), Proceedings of World Conference on E-Learning in Corporate, Government, Healthcare, and Higher Education 2007 &lt;br /&gt;
*Beatty, B. &amp;amp; Ulasewicz, C. (2006) [http://www.springerlink.com/content/bg0613214k409500/ Faculty Perspectives on Moving from Blackboard to the Moodle Learning Management System]. TechTrends Volume 50, Number 4, 36-45.&lt;br /&gt;
*Berggren, A. et al (2005) [http://74.125.155.132/scholar?q=cache:2t2PDSl4o_4J:scholar.google.com/+moodle&amp;amp;hl=en&amp;amp;as_sdt=0,5 Practical and Pedagogical Issues for Teacher Adoption of IMS Learning Design Standards in Moodle LMS]. Journal of Interactive Media in Education, 2005(02)&lt;br /&gt;
*Brandl, K. (2007) [http://74.125.155.132/scholar?q=cache:b1gGpxaaCR0J:scholar.google.com/+moodle&amp;amp;hl=en&amp;amp;as_sdt=0,5 Are You Ready to &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;?]. Language Learning &amp;amp; Technology, May 2005, Vol.9(2)&lt;br /&gt;
*Burgos, D. et al. (2007) [http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/download?doi=10.1.1.169.251&amp;amp;rep=rep1&amp;amp;type=pdf A First Step Mapping IMS Learning Design and Moodle]. Journal of Universal Computer Science, Vol. 13 (7).&lt;br /&gt;
*Cowan, P. (2006). [http://www.editlib.org/p/22507 Factors influencing Pre-Service teachers’ attitudes towards using a Moodle environment for teaching and learning]. In C. Crawford et al. (Eds.), Proceedings of Society for Information Technology &amp;amp; Teacher Education International Conference 2006&lt;br /&gt;
*Deng, Y. &amp;amp; Hemphill, L. (2006). [http://www.editlib.org/p/22054 Demonstrating Online K12 Teaching Strategies in a Moodle Course Management Environment]. In C. Crawford et al. (Eds.), Proceedings of Society for Information Technology &amp;amp; Teacher Education International Conference 2006&lt;br /&gt;
*DeSchryver, M., Mishra, P., Koehleer, M. &amp;amp; Francis, A. (2009). [http://www.editlib.org/?fuseaction=Reader.ViewFullText&amp;amp;paper_id=30612 Moodle vs. Facebook: Does using Facebook for Discussions in an Online Course Enhance Perceived Social Presence and Student Interaction?]. In I. Gibson et al. (Eds.), Proceedings of Society for Information Technology &amp;amp; Teacher Education International Conference 2009&lt;br /&gt;
*Dougiamas, M. &amp;amp; Taylor, P. (2003). [http://www.editlib.org/p/13739 Moodle: Using Learning Communities to Create an Open Source Course Management System]. In D. Lassner &amp;amp; C. McNaught (Eds.), Proceedings of World Conference on Educational Multimedia, Hypermedia and Telecommunications 2003.&lt;br /&gt;
*Graf, S. &amp;amp;List, B.(2005) [http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpl/freeabs_all.jsp?arnumber=1508637 An evaluation of open source e-learning platforms stressing adaptation issues]. Advanced Learning Technologies, 2005. ICALT 2005.&lt;br /&gt;
*Guttierez, E. et al. (2009) [http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&amp;amp;_udi=B6VCJ-4XB1967-2&amp;amp;_user=10&amp;amp;_coverDate=02%2F28%2F2010&amp;amp;_rdoc=1&amp;amp;_fmt=high&amp;amp;_orig=gateway&amp;amp;_origin=gateway&amp;amp;_sort=d&amp;amp;_docanchor=&amp;amp;view=c&amp;amp;_searchStrId=1688004089&amp;amp;_rerunOrigin=scholar.google&amp;amp;_acct=C000050221&amp;amp;_version=1&amp;amp;_urlVersion=0&amp;amp;_userid=10&amp;amp;md5=f9a939ec272e44d724d630209831642a&amp;amp;searchtype=a A new Moodle module supporting automatic verification of VHDL-based assignments]. Computers &amp;amp; Education, Vol 54 (2), Feb 2010. &lt;br /&gt;
*Hueros, D. &amp;amp; Sanchez, A. (2010) [http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&amp;amp;_udi=B6VDC-50HWJ4Y-4&amp;amp;_user=10&amp;amp;_coverDate=11%2F30%2F2010&amp;amp;_rdoc=1&amp;amp;_fmt=high&amp;amp;_orig=gateway&amp;amp;_origin=gateway&amp;amp;_sort=d&amp;amp;_docanchor=&amp;amp;view=c&amp;amp;_searchStrId=1687987167&amp;amp;_rerunOrigin=scholar.google&amp;amp;_acct=C000050221&amp;amp;_version=1&amp;amp;_urlVersion=0&amp;amp;_userid=10&amp;amp;md5=15927cf368be7fc0df80aa91ac4e92a3&amp;amp;searchtype=a Motivational factors that influence the acceptance of Moodle using Technology Acceptance Model (TAM)]. Computers in Human Behavior. Vol. 26(6) Nov 2010.&lt;br /&gt;
*Jide, W. &amp;amp; Li, Z. (2009) [http://en.cnki.com.cn/Article_en/CJFDTOTAL-YCJY200905004.htm New Progresses in the Domestic Research on Moodle] Journal of Distance Education.&lt;br /&gt;
*Knutzen, B. &amp;amp; Kennedy, D.M. (2008). [http://www.editlib.org/p/28913 Can Learning to Use Moodle Alter Teachers’ Approaches to Teaching?]. In J. Luca &amp;amp; E. Weippl (Eds.), Proceedings of World Conference on Educational Multimedia, Hypermedia and Telecommunications 2008&lt;br /&gt;
*Pfaffman, J. (2004). [http://www.editlib.org/p/13664 Integrating Moodle into a Course for Pre- and In-service Teachers]. In R. Ferdig et al. (Eds.), Proceedings of Society for Information Technology &amp;amp; Teacher Education International Conference 2004&lt;br /&gt;
*Kemp, J. Livingstone, D. (2008) [http://74.125.155.132/scholar?q=cache:Kvnq5aCMDSwJ:scholar.google.com/+moodle&amp;amp;hl=en&amp;amp;as_sdt=0,5 Integrating Web-Based and 3D Learning Environments: Second Life Meets Moodle]. UPGRADE Vol. IX, No. 3, June 2008&lt;br /&gt;
*Romero,C. et al (2009) [http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&amp;amp;_udi=B6V03-4R98K46-7&amp;amp;_user=10&amp;amp;_coverDate=03%2F31%2F2009&amp;amp;_rdoc=1&amp;amp;_fmt=high&amp;amp;_orig=gateway&amp;amp;_origin=gateway&amp;amp;_sort=d&amp;amp;_docanchor=&amp;amp;view=c&amp;amp;_searchStrId=1687992777&amp;amp;_rerunOrigin=scholar.google&amp;amp;_acct=C000050221&amp;amp;_version=1&amp;amp;_urlVersion=0&amp;amp;_userid=10&amp;amp;md5=f15fe515105a3c120401c2a6c6d1551e&amp;amp;searchtype=a Evolutionary algorithms for subgroup discovery in e-learning: A practical application using Moodle data]. Expert Systems with Applications, Volume 36(2)1, March 2009.&lt;br /&gt;
*Romero, S. Ventura, C. &amp;amp; Garcia, E. (2007) [http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&amp;amp;_udi=B6VCJ-4P7FCT6-1&amp;amp;_user=10&amp;amp;_coverDate=08%2F31%2F2008&amp;amp;_rdoc=1&amp;amp;_fmt=high&amp;amp;_orig=gateway&amp;amp;_origin=gateway&amp;amp;_sort=d&amp;amp;_docanchor=&amp;amp;view=c&amp;amp;_searchStrId=1686659096&amp;amp;_rerunOrigin=scholar.google&amp;amp;_acct=C000050221&amp;amp;_version=1&amp;amp;_urlVersion=0&amp;amp;_userid=10&amp;amp;md5=b77769e114cba19d78a12526b8755858&amp;amp;searchtype=a Data mining in course management systems: Moodle case study and tutorial]. Computers &amp;amp; Education. Vol. 51 (1), Aug 2008 (Abstract only, paid access). &lt;br /&gt;
*Li, P. et al. (2009) [http://en.cnki.com.cn/Article_en/CJFDTOTAL-YCJY200803014.htm Classroom Response Systems Based on Moodle]. Distance Education Journal;2008-03&lt;br /&gt;
*Martín-Blas, T. &amp;amp; Serrano-Fernández (2009) [http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&amp;amp;_udi=B6VCJ-4T2RYPV-1&amp;amp;_user=10&amp;amp;_coverDate=01%2F31%2F2009&amp;amp;_rdoc=1&amp;amp;_fmt=high&amp;amp;_orig=gateway&amp;amp;_origin=gateway&amp;amp;_sort=d&amp;amp;_docanchor=&amp;amp;view=c&amp;amp;_searchStrId=1687986242&amp;amp;_rerunOrigin=scholar.google&amp;amp;_acct=C000050221&amp;amp;_version=1&amp;amp;_urlVersion=0&amp;amp;_userid=10&amp;amp;md5=81ca28b957fbd194f133ad342073759a&amp;amp;searchtype=a The role of new technologies in the learning process: Moodle as a teaching tool in Physics]. Computers &amp;amp; Education. Vol. 52(1), Jan 2009.&lt;br /&gt;
*Meurant, R.C. (2009) [http://www.springerlink.com/content/u08884qr83704276/ Computer-Based Internet-Hosted Assessment of L2 Literacy: Computerizing and Administering of the Oxford Quick Placement Test in ExamView and Moodle].Communications in Computer and Information Science, 2009, Vol. 60.&lt;br /&gt;
*Rakoczi, Gergely. (2010) [http://www.fm-kp.si/zalozba/ISBN/978-961-266-066-6/prispevki/rakoczi.pdf &amp;quot;Cast your Eyes on Moodle: An Eye Tracking Study investigating learning with Moodle&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
*Liu Suqin &amp;amp; Li Jiahou (2007) [http://en.cnki.com.cn/Article_en/CJFDTOTAL-YCJY200701002.htm Curriculum Design BIG6 Mode Based on Moodle]. Distance Education Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
*Stewart, B. et al (2007) [http://www.igi-global.com/bookstore/article.aspx?TitleId=1705 Choosing MOODLE: An Evaluation of Learning Management Systems at Athabasca University. International Journal of Distance Education Technologies (IJDET)]. Vol. 5(3)&lt;br /&gt;
*Zenha-Rela,M. &amp;amp; Carvalho, R.(2006) [http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpl/freeabs_all.jsp?arnumber=4117034 Work in Progress: Self Evaluation Through Monitored Peer Review Using the Moodle Platform]. Frontiers in Education Conference.&lt;br /&gt;
*Zhiqiang, M &amp;amp; Yanli, W. (2008) [http://en.cnki.com.cn/Article_en/CJFDTOTAL-DDJY200807013.htm An Analysis of Moodle-based Online Learning Barriers]. Distance Education in China, Aug 2008.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Presentations and videos==&lt;br /&gt;
==Other material (eg projects)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=LMS research - general=&lt;br /&gt;
Broader academic, governmental, organisational research on LMS/VLE useful to Moodle to learn from. Check [[Moodle research FAQ|here]] for details. &lt;br /&gt;
==Print (papers, reports, collections, theses...)==&lt;br /&gt;
*Carmean, C. &amp;amp; Haefner,J. (2002). [http://net.educause.edu/ir/library/pdf/ERM0261.pdf Mind over matter: Transforming course management systems into effective learning environments]. EDUCAUSE Review, Vol. 37, No. 6, pp. 27–33.&lt;br /&gt;
*Chang, Chinhong Lim (2008) [http://firstmonday.org/htbin/cgiwrap/bin/ojs/index.php/fm/article/view/2530/2303 Faculty Perceptions and Utilization of a Learning Management System in Higher Education] (dissertation)&lt;br /&gt;
*Keesee, G. &amp;amp; Shepard, M.(2011) [http://www.westga.edu/~distance/ojdla/spring141/keesee_shepard141.html Perceived Attributes Predict Course Management System Adopter Status]. Online Journal of Distance Learning Administration, Vol 14/1.&lt;br /&gt;
*Lane, L. (2009) [http://firstmonday.org/htbin/cgiwrap/bin/ojs/index.php/fm/article/view/2530/2303 Insidious pedagogy: How course management systems impact teaching]. First Monday, Vol. 14, Number 10 - 5 Oct 2009&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ofsted OFSTED] (2009) [http://www.ofsted.gov.uk/Ofsted-home/Publications-and-research/Browse-all-by/Documents-by-type/Thematic-reports/Virtual-learning-environments-an-evaluation-of-their-development-in-a-sample-of-educational-settings Virtual learning environments: an evaluation of their development in a sample of educational settings].&lt;br /&gt;
*Sancar, H. &amp;amp; Cagiltay, K. (2008). [http://www.editlib.org/p/28931 Effective Use of LMS: Pedagogy through the Technology]. In J. Luca &amp;amp; E. Weippl (Eds.), Proceedings of World Conference on Educational Multimedia, Hypermedia and Telecommunications 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Presentations and videos==&lt;br /&gt;
==Other material==&lt;br /&gt;
=Questions? Try here=&lt;br /&gt;
See the growing list at [[Moodle research FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=102235</id>
		<title>Working with files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Working_with_files&amp;diff=102235"/>
		<updated>2012-11-29T03:56:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding database acitivity file field&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle provides an easy way for a teacher to present materials to their students. These materials may take the form of files such as word-processed documents or slideshow presentations. The materials can be displayed on the page either as individual items or bundled together inside folders. One teacher might for instance wish to share a single research document in pdf format; another might have a folder of sample past examination papers for students to download.&lt;br /&gt;
*Most types of files can be uploaded and accessed through Moodle but the student needs to have the correct software to be able to open them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding files==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add files or folders, a teacher needs to have the editing turned on in their course and then select either [[File]] or [[Folder]] from the activity chooser (or &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filefolder23.png|thumb|Selecting a file or folder in the activity chooser]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Workingwithfiles.png|thumb|The &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The screen for uploading and displaying a file (or folder of files) includes an &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Clicking on this button takes you to the [[File picker]] which is the name given to the file storage and access area within Moodle. Find out more about the places you can upload or add files from in the [[File picker]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is also a block (with an arrow) into which you can drag and drop a file straight from your desktop into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newdraganddrop.png|thumb|Area for dragging and dropping files into]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once uploaded, files appear as thumbnails in the file manager for easy recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
* Files view can be easily toggled between icons view or a table view with sizes and dates, or a hierarchical list view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:truthumbnailsiconsview.png|thumb|File picker icon view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:tableview.png|thumb|File picker table view]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:hierarchicallistview.png|thumb|File picker hierarchical list view]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing or updating uploaded files==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clicking on the  name of an uploaded file opens up a pop up dialogue box which allows file details quickly to be altered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:popupdialogue.png|thumb|File info popup dialogue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating an alias/shortcut==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an uploaded file (or a file from the Box.net, file system or EQUELLA repositories) is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or &#039;&#039;alias&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If an alias is created, then when the original file is updated, it will change in all instances of the alias. So a teacher might add course notes to their private files for example, and then add them into a number of courses. When the teacher makes an alteration in the file in their private files, this alteration will be reflected in all instances of the course notes.&lt;br /&gt;
*An alias can be recognised by its thumbnail. See the difference in the screenshot below between the original file (left) and the alias (right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:alias.png|thumb|Creating an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:shortcut1.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Areas in which aliases cannot be made===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alias cannot be made in the following areas of Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* an assignment submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a forum post attachment&lt;br /&gt;
* a workshop submission&lt;br /&gt;
* a quiz essay&lt;br /&gt;
* a database activity file field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is to prevent cases such as a student uploading an item for assessment and then subsequently changing the original in their private files. When a student uses a file from their private files in one of these instances, they do not see the options to &amp;quot;copy&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;create an alias&amp;quot;. Below is an example of a file added to an assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:aliasassignment.png|thumb|Assignment submission with no option to create an alias]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a single file with students: [[File]]&lt;br /&gt;
*How to share a folder of files with students: [[Folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions about the file picker: [[File picker FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IrOKxYRJvGU How teachers upload files in Moodle 2 video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Arbeiten mit Dateien und Verzeichnissen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Utilisation de fichiers]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Text_editor&amp;diff=101618</id>
		<title>Text editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Text_editor&amp;diff=101618"/>
		<updated>2012-10-31T04:02:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Added instructions for disabling the spell checker&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
The text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039; or even &#039;TinyMCE&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HTMLeditor tools M2 1.png|thumb|The standard version of the text editor tool bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List of groups==&lt;br /&gt;
For those who are not familiar with the tool bar, here are the functions listed by group using the above example.  Remember that the site administrator can edit or provide additonal toolbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_font_style.png]] - Font, size and heading group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_undo_redo.png]] - Undo and Redo group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_find_replace.png]] - Find and Replace group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_fullscreen_1.png]]|Full screen toggle&lt;br /&gt;
Row 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML editor group text effects.png]] - Text effect group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML editor group line format.png]] - Line format group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_formatting.png]] - Formatting group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_color.png]] - Color group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_paragraph.png]] - Paragraph group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_lists.png]] - Number and Bullets and indents&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_link.png]] - Link group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_insert.png]] - Insert group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_HTML_spell.png]] - HTML source toggle &amp;amp; spellchecker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special features==&lt;br /&gt;
===Color pickers===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_color.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 levels of selecting a font or background color, &lt;br /&gt;
*A quick pick 5x8 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;More colors&amp;quot; that links to Picker, Pallet and Named tabs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_basic_1.png|A quick pick 5x8 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_picker_1.png|A rainbow color picker tab&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_pallet_1.png|A Pallet tab with a 18x12 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_named_1.png|A Named tab with custom pallets&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Insert images and media===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HTML_editor_group_insert_MU_1.png|thumb|The Insert images and media group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 1 Insert Image - uses [[File picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Insert Emoticon (only visible if the site administrator has enabled the &amp;quot;show emoticons as images&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;filter in Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Filters&amp;gt;Manage filters&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 3 Insert Media - uses [[File picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
* 4 Insert Equation - uses java script editor&lt;br /&gt;
* 5 Insert Non breaking space &lt;br /&gt;
* 6 Insert Custom character - Special keyboard characters&lt;br /&gt;
* 7 Insert Table -&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Files_File_picker_upload_files_add_1.png|File picker Upload file screen&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML editor equation editor 1.png|Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_custom_character_selector_1.png|Custom character selector&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Insert table====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTMLeditor_Insert_Table_general_1.png|General tab&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTMLeditor_Insert_Table_advanced_1.png|Advanced tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To add borders to a table&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cell borders are crucial for helping readers to follow the rows across the screen. If they aren’t showing already you can add them as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Wiki page containing your table, click its Edit tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Carefully select all the cells of the table&lt;br /&gt;
#Then right click (Macs: Command+click or Ctrl+Click) over any part of your selection to get a context menu; from it select Cell &amp;gt; Table Cell Properties; the cell properties dialog box then loads.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on its Advanced tab, set Border Color to black (for instance), then click Apply, and then click Update.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save; the Wiki page containing your table will then load displaying its borders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage editors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can enable / disable text editors in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. By default the TinyMCE HTML editor and plain text area are enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Disabling the built-in spell checker====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to disable the TinyMCE spell checker and rely on browser spell checker functionality instead, you can do this by disabling the &#039;&#039;spellchecker&#039;&#039; plugin. Navigate to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039; and click the eye icon for this plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Spell engine settings====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Spellengine.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The TinyMCE HTML editor used by Moodle has Google Spell as its default spell engine (spell-checker). This can be changed by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If PSpellSpell is selected then aspell 0.50 or later must be installed on your server and the path to aspell set in Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; System Paths. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Spellcheck.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====HTML settings====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can edit the emoticons (or smileys) used in the text editor in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; HTML settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Available fonts list====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}In addition to the default fonts, a site administrator can add extra fonts by typing their name and string in the box in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor&#039;&#039; as demonstrated in the screencast [http://youtu.be/udP7Bnur30Y How to add extra fonts].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xJE6UhqnyjU  HTML editor in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Activity_completion_settings&amp;diff=101162</id>
		<title>Activity completion settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Activity_completion_settings&amp;diff=101162"/>
		<updated>2012-10-09T01:59:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Correction&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activity completion}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Activity settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the type of activity, there are different completion requirements. For example, a [[Page|Page]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require view&#039;&#039;; a [[Quiz|Quiz]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require grade&#039;&#039; while a [[Forum|Forum]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require posts/discussions/replies&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Activity_completion_settings_common.png|Common settings for most graded activities&lt;br /&gt;
File:Forumactivitycompletion.png|Forum activity settings&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Completion tracking===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Do not indicate activity completion&#039;&#039; - this will not show checks(ticks)next to the activity&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Students can manually mark the activity as completed&#039;&#039; - students press the check(tick) to change it. (Note: they can do this even without doing the activity!)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Show activity as complete when conditions are met&#039;&#039; - the selected completion criteria must be met before the check(tick) will change style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require view===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is turned on, students have to view the activity in order to complete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases, clicking the link is enough to &#039;view&#039; the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
* You should usually not turn on the &#039;view&#039; condition if you have other requirements - this makes extra work for the server and it&#039;s unlikely that a student could meet any other conditions without viewing the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require grade===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is turned on, students have to get a grade on the activity in order to complete it. For example, a quiz would be marked completed as soon as the user submits it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It does not matter how well the student did. Getting any grade will mark the activity completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to distinguish between &#039;pass&#039; and &#039;fail&#039; grades so that the activity becomes &#039;completed, passed&#039; or &#039;completed, not passed&#039; instead of just &#039;completed&#039;. These results show a different icon and alternative text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set this up, you need to specify the pass value for this activity&#039;s individual grade:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the course gradebook by clicking the &#039;Grades&#039; link on the course administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;Choose an action&#039; dropdown, pick &#039;Categories and items&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit icon next to the grade item for this activity.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on &#039;Show Advanced&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type a grade value (e.g. 5.0) in the &#039;Grade to pass&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this, anybody submitting the quiz will receive either the pass or fail completion icon. If the quiz can be taken multiple times, the completion icon will automatically update whenever the grade does.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one limitation: this only works if grades are immediately visible to students. The grade must be neither permanently hidden, nor hidden until a certain date. If a grade is hidden then only the standard &#039;completed&#039; state will be displayed - even once the hidden date has passed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Expect completed on===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The date is not shown to students and is only displayed in the [[Activity completion report]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require posts===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot; the student must either start a discussion or reply to a discussion. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot;, the student must start a discussion topic. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require replies===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot; the student must reply to a discussion. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locked completion options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If at least one person has completed an activity, completion options are &#039;locked&#039;. This is because changing these options may result in unexpected behaviour.  For example, if somebody has ticked an activity as manually completed, and you then set it to automatic completion, the activity will become unticked - very confusing for the student who had already ticked it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; It is best not to unlock options unless you are sure it won&#039;t cause problems - for example, if you know that students don&#039;t have access to the course yet, so it will only be staff who have marked the activity completed when testing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens when you unlock==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you unlock options and then click &#039;Save changes&#039;, all completion information for the activity will be deleted and, if possible, regenerated according to the new settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the new completion option is manual, everyone will be set to &#039;not completed&#039; regardless of any previous setting.&lt;br /&gt;
* If it is automatic then, depending on the options chosen, the system may or may not be able to construct a correct current value for everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
** The &#039;viewed&#039; requirement will not work - even if a student has viewed the activity before, it will not be marked completed until they view it again.&lt;br /&gt;
** Most other options will be recalculated successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you change completion options while a student is logged in, they may not see the changes for some minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Required site settings==&lt;br /&gt;
To use activity completion, the feature needs to be enabled for the site by an administrator as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; [[Advanced_features| Advanced features]]&#039;&#039; check the &amp;quot;Enable completion tracking&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; The default [[Cron]] trigger for activity completion is every 10 minutes.   Students and Teachers often think any course completion should instantly show up in a report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Required course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; and look for the &#039;&#039;Student progress&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must select at least &amp;quot;Enabled, control via (course) completion and activity settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen zum Aktivitätsabschluss]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Upgrade_overview&amp;diff=100630</id>
		<title>Upgrade overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Upgrade_overview&amp;diff=100630"/>
		<updated>2012-09-21T06:52:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Amending plugin notes&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;navtrail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Main page]] ► [[Installation]] ► [[{{PAGENAME}}]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;small-info-right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Moodle 2.3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;available now!&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start enjoying the cool features of the latest and greatest version of Moodle in four easy steps...&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Step 1: Make sure that your server can run Moodle 2.2==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:checklist.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
(Note: You need to upgrade to Moodle 2.2 before upgrading to 2.3.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Environment&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status OK for everything? Great! Go to step 2...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any problems?  You probably need to upgrade your server software (such as PHP) to a more recent version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Step 2: Be prepared!==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:backup.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
As usual with any large upgrade, you should always be prepared to &amp;quot;roll back&amp;quot; if there&#039;s an issue with your data or some custom code you&#039;ve added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; A test install: We highly advise you make a copy of your production site to practice the upgrade on first.  That way, if you run into any problems that need fixing you won&#039;t affect your main site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Always make backups: When upgrading your production instance, make sure you have copies of everything, just in case.  Full instructions are here: [[Site backup]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Step 3: Replace your Moodle code==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point you can replace the Moodle code on your server with the version you downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Check plugins: Any plugins you have installed will also to be replaced with a version for your new Moodle version. If there is not yet an updated version of the plugin available, it will need to be uninstalled before upgrading your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Step 4: Perform the upgrade!==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gears.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger the upgrade by [[Upgrading#Finishing_the_upgrade|visiting the admin page]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large site this may take hours, so we recommend [[Administration_via_command_line#Upgrading_via_command_line|upgrading via command line]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How did you go?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Yes - it worked!: Great!  Repeat the process for Moodle 2.3, and please post in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28 Installation problems forum] and share your success with the Moodle community!&lt;br /&gt;
; No - I had an error: Don’t worry, help is at hand. Post in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28 Installation problems forum] where our experts are waiting to explain any errors you obtain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrading]] for full details of the process&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrading FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Installation]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_security_procedures&amp;diff=100574</id>
		<title>Moodle security procedures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Moodle_security_procedures&amp;diff=100574"/>
		<updated>2012-09-18T06:37:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding note about holding issues until release.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This is a draft document.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We treat  security issues in Moodle software very seriously. Even though we dedicate a lot of time designing our code to avoid such problems, it is inevitable in a project of this size that new vulnerabilities will occasionally be discovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Disclosure policy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We practice &#039;&#039;responsible&#039;&#039; disclosure, which means we have a policy of disclosing all security issues that come to our attention, but only after we have solved the issue and given registered Moodle sites time to upgrade or patch their installations. Please note it is considered irresponsible to publicly repost mailed security notices &#039;&#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039;&#039; they are published at moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We ask that when reporting a security issue, you observe these same guidelines, and beyond communicating with the security team (led by Petr Škoda), do not share your knowledge of security issues with the public at large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I report a  security issue?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please &amp;quot;[http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/CreateIssue.jspa Create a new issue]&amp;quot; in the Moodle tracker describing the problem (and solution if possible) in detail. Make sure you set the security level accurately to make sure that the security team sees it. Bugs classified as a &amp;quot;Serious security issue&amp;quot; are hidden from everyone apart from the security team and the person who reported the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are not sure whether an issue is a security issue, you should still create a new issue in the tracker for review, using the security level &amp;quot;Could be a security issue&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please do NOT post about security issues in the forums on moodle.org. This will cause the issue to be more widely known before a fix can be prepared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How we deal with a reported security issue==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The security team reviews the issue and evaluates its potential impact on all supported versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
# The security team works with the issue reporter to resolve the problem, keeping details of the problem and its solution hidden until a release is made.&lt;br /&gt;
# New versions are created and tested.&lt;br /&gt;
# New packages are created and made available on download.moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
# Advisories are mailed to administrators of registered Moodle sites.&lt;br /&gt;
# A public announcement is made about the security issue in the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7128 Moodle security news forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sicherheitsprozeduren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=admin/setting/local_reminders&amp;diff=99854</id>
		<title>admin/setting/local reminders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=admin/setting/local_reminders&amp;diff=99854"/>
		<updated>2012-08-07T04:00:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:reminders_icon.png]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Calendar Reminders plugin creates reminders for Moodle calendar events and sends them automatically to relevant users in a timely manner via Moodle messaging interface. This is a local plugin controlled by the site administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
* Reminders can have customised delivery times/methods according to event types.&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can control how they receive calendar reminders in their messaging preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reminders are automatically sent (as long as the system [[Cron]] process is set up).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
# Fetch the plug-in from following location.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Go to [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=local_reminders Reminders] and download the latest version from the repository.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the &#039;local&#039; directory inside Moodle root directory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Extract the downloaded zip file inside to this folder. After it is extracted, there should be a &amp;quot;reminders&amp;quot; folder in the local folder with a structure as shown in the [[:dev:Email_reminders_for_calendar_events|project developer documentation]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Log into the Moodle site as the admin user. Usually the new plugin will be identified and notified you when logged-in. If not, go to Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications to detect and automatically install the local plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you can change the plug-in specific settings via Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Local plugins &amp;gt; Reminders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Screenshots ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sample e-mail reminder ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sample_reminder_msg.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administrator settings page ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admin_settings.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want to change the cron frequency of reminders plugin, open version.php file in the reminders directory and change the value corresponding to $plugin-&amp;gt;cron. That value must be in seconds and it is the interval between two cron cycles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Mentors: [http://moodle.org/user/view.php?id=381842&amp;amp;course=5 Michael de Raadt] and [http://moodle.org/user/view.php?id=955449&amp;amp;course=5 Rossiani Wijaya]&lt;br /&gt;
* Special thanks goes to [http://moodle.org/user/profile.php?id=1297063 Luiggi Sansonetti] who translated the plugin into French language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bugs and Improvements ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Please report bugs and improvements on the Tracker using the [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/12134 Local: Calendar Reminders] component.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Download location from plugin repository, [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=local_reminders Local Reminders]&lt;br /&gt;
* CONTRIB-3647 Automating Email reminders for calendar events project in Tracker.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plugin development [https://github.com/isuru89/moodle-reminders-for-calendar-events Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum post [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=201744 Local Plugin - Email Reminders for Calendar Events]&lt;br /&gt;
* RSS Feed from Personal Blog, [http://uisurumadushanka89.blogspot.com/feeds/posts/default/-/gsoc RSS Feed].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=admin/setting/local_reminders&amp;diff=99853</id>
		<title>admin/setting/local reminders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=admin/setting/local_reminders&amp;diff=99853"/>
		<updated>2012-08-07T03:59:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:reminders_icon.png]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Calendar Reminders plugin creates reminders for Moodle calendar events and sends them automatically to relevant users in a timely manner via Moodle messaging interface. This is a local plugin controlled by the site administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
* Reminders can have customised delivery times/methods according to event types.&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can control how they receive calendar reminders in their messaging preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reminders are automatically sent (as long as the system [[Cron]] process is set up).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
# Fetch the plug-in from following location.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Go to [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=local_reminders Reminders] and download the latest version from the repository.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the &#039;local&#039; directory inside Moodle root directory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Extract the downloaded zip file inside to this folder. After it is extracted, there should be a &amp;quot;reminders&amp;quot; folder in the local folder with a structure as shown in the [[:dev:Email_reminders_for_calendar_events|project developer documentation]].&lt;br /&gt;
# Log into the Moodle site as the admin user. Usually the new plugin will be identified and notified you when logged-in. If not, go to Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications to detect and automatically install the local plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you can change the plug-in specific settings via Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Local plugins &amp;gt; Reminders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Screenshots ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sample e-mail reminder ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sample_reminder_msg.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administrator settings page ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:admin_settings.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want to change the cron frequency of reminders plugin, open version.php file in the reminders directory and change the value corresponding to $plugin-&amp;gt;cron. That value must be in seconds and it is the interval between two cron cycles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Mentors: [http://moodle.org/user/view.php?id=381842&amp;amp;course=5 Michael de Raadt] and [http://moodle.org/user/view.php?id=955449&amp;amp;course=5 Rossiani Wijaya]&lt;br /&gt;
* Special thanks goes to [http://moodle.org/user/profile.php?id=1297063 Luiggi Sansonetti] who translated the plugin into French language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bugs and Improvements ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Please report bugs and improvements on the Tracker using the [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/12134 Local: Calendar Reminders] component.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Download location from plugin repository, [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=local_reminders Local Reminders]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB-3647 CONTRIB-3647] Automating Email reminders for calendar events project in Tracker.&lt;br /&gt;
* Plugin development [https://github.com/isuru89/moodle-reminders-for-calendar-events Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum post [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=201744 Local Plugin - Email Reminders for Calendar Events]&lt;br /&gt;
* RSS Feed from Personal Blog, [http://uisurumadushanka89.blogspot.com/feeds/posts/default/-/gsoc RSS Feed].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=99438</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=99438"/>
		<updated>2012-07-25T05:29:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ProgressBar.gif|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See a [http://youtu.be/d43KVlMBmLA video demo].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Simple_Clock_block&amp;diff=99410</id>
		<title>Simple Clock block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Simple_Clock_block&amp;diff=99410"/>
		<updated>2012-07-24T04:39:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding acknowledgement and shifting links to end&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockDefault.png|right|alt=Simple clock block showing site theme icon and user pic]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintains time difference between page loads&lt;br /&gt;
* Shows site icon and user image as clock icons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Simple Clock block is installed like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to achieve the following configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Show server clock, user clock or both&lt;br /&gt;
* Show day names&lt;br /&gt;
* Show seconds&lt;br /&gt;
* Hide header/title&lt;br /&gt;
* Hide clock icons&lt;br /&gt;
* Change block title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockServerOnly.png|alt=Simple clock block shown with server only]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockUserOnly.png|alt=Simple clock block shown with user only]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockDays.png|alt=Simple clock with days shown]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockSeconds.png|alt=Simple clock with seconds shown]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockNoHeader.png‎|alt=Simple clock with no header]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SimpleClockBlockNoIcons.png|alt=Simple clock with no icons]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuration instructions see [[blocks/simple_clock]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Luiggi Sansonetti for a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_simple_clock Moodle Plugins repository entry]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10620 Bug Tracker Page for Simple Clock] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://github.com/deraadt/moodle-block_simple_clock.git Git repository for Simple Clock]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Administration_FAQ&amp;diff=98350</id>
		<title>Administration FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Administration_FAQ&amp;diff=98350"/>
		<updated>2012-06-14T04:52:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding CLI method of password change&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}==Changing text in Moodle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language editing interface in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Language&amp;gt; [[Language_customization|Language customisation]]&#039;&#039; enables you to easily change any word or phrase used on the site.  You may need to search through several files to find the word or phrase you are looking for. The file moodle.php contains all common site-wide phrases and the admin.php contains many admin phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do the limits on uploaded files work? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[File upload size]] for more information.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File upload sizes are restricted in a number of ways - each one in the list restricts the following ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Not very likely these days (i.e. check if the other settings don&#039;t work), there is a setting in Apache 2 which you may need to change. You can change the limit by adding or editing a line in Apache&#039;s &#039;&#039;/usr/local/apache2/conf/httpd.conf&#039;&#039; with the upload size in bytes (check your operating system&#039;s documentation for the correct location - e.g. under /etc/apache2 is a common alternative):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LimitRequestBody 10485760&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. PHP also has limits. If you have access to it they are set in your site-wide &#039;&#039;&#039;php.ini&#039;&#039;&#039; file. On shared hosting you may be able to set these in a &#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039; file or a &#039;&#039;php.ini&#039;&#039;. You are recommended to check with your hosting company how this works on their systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a php.ini file the lines will look something like:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    upload_max_filesize 64M&lt;br /&gt;
    post_max_size 64M&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...in .htaccess the entries will look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 php_value upload_max_filesize 64M&lt;br /&gt;
 php_value post_max_size 64M&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An .htaccess file usually can be placed in the root of your Moodle install and will affect the whole Moodle. A (non site-wide) php.ini file may need to be copied into all the directories it needs to affect. The following are a good start:&lt;br /&gt;
    * public_html&lt;br /&gt;
    * moodle/admin&lt;br /&gt;
    * moodle/course&lt;br /&gt;
    * moodle/files&lt;br /&gt;
    * moodle/repository&lt;br /&gt;
    * root of your moodledata directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that a server re-start may be required for the above changes to take effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Moodle has a site-wide limit called maxbytes that may be set in Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site Policies &amp;gt; Maximum uploaded file size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out the server limit setting in php.ini (without server access, just using the Moodle administration interface), check out &#039;&#039;Site Administration block &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; PHP info&#039;&#039; (Tip: search for filesize)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. A limit may be set by teachers in the [[course/edit|Course settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Activity modules such as [[Forums]] and [[Assignments]] have their own limits which may be set when adding or editing the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;See also&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=39625 Detailed instructions to increase the maximum allowed size for uploaded files] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=97907 Instructions to increase maximum allowed size on hosted servers] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File_upload_size|File Upload Size]] page&lt;br /&gt;
* Instructions below on How to change the maximum execution time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to change upload file size on a Windows localhost==&lt;br /&gt;
In a localhost (using a [[Complete install packages for Windows]] on a computer) for 1.6 it is easy to change the uploaded file size to something larger than the default 16M. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of how to change the upload file size to 100M.&lt;br /&gt;
*Find ..&#039;&#039;&#039;/php/php.ini&#039;&#039;&#039; and open it with WordPad by right-clicking -&amp;gt; Open With -&amp;gt; then choose WordPad.  &lt;br /&gt;
*In this file scroll or do a search on the text &amp;quot;_max_&amp;quot; to find &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;upload_max_filesize = 16M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;    &lt;br /&gt;
*Change that line to&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 100M&lt;br /&gt;
*In the same way, find &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;post_max_size = 16M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;      &lt;br /&gt;
*Change that line to&lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 100M&lt;br /&gt;
*Save the file.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After any changes to the php.ini file you need to restart Apache. So restart xampp and browse to localhost. You should find that the Upload file size in Configuration now reads 100M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;See also&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Instructions below on How to change the maximum execution time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to change the maximum execution time ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A side-effect of increasing the file upload limit is that the php scripts may execute beyond the limit set by default (300 seconds/5 minutes). To change this, look for max_execution_time in php.ini and change to something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 max_execution_time = 600&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Apache and have a .htaccess file to change php settings, add this line to your .htaccess file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 php_value max_execution_time 600&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Restart your webserver for these changes to take effect, and check that the values have been changed by looking at your phpinfo output in the moodle admin -&amp;gt; environment page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== I have forgotten the admin password ==&lt;br /&gt;
First, try using the button &amp;quot;Send my details via email&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to reset the admin user&#039;s password using [[Administration_via_command_line#Reset_user_password|command line tools]] provided with Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Failing that, if you can access the database using an administration tool, you can modify a password there. Passwords for all users, including admin, are stored encrypted in the table &#039;&#039;mdl_user&#039;&#039;. Copy the guest password (the encrypted version of &amp;quot;guest&amp;quot;) into the admin password field, login using it, then change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional solutions are detailed in the discussions [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=18103 change admin&#039;s password] and [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=4552&amp;amp;parent=38070 login/password].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My log table has disappeared - No logs found! ==&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely cause is that the mdl_log table has become corrupted. See the [[How to check your database for corruption]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My style sheet changes aren&#039;t showing up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browsers usually cache style sheets and so a forced refresh (CTRL + F5) is required before any changes show up.&lt;br /&gt;
Also, in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;Themes&amp;gt;Theme selector&#039;&#039;, click &amp;quot;clear theme caches&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site-wide scales ==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a site-wide scale, available in all courses, go to &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Scales&#039;&#039; and click the button &amp;quot;Add a new scale&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*As an administrator you also have the right to add site-wide scales within a course by going to &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Scales&#039;&#039;. (A regular teacher cannot do this.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do I see &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[missing strings]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double square brackets around text indicate that language strings are missing. Try checking for untranslated words or phrases in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; [[Language editing]]&#039;&#039; and update local language packs in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; [[Language packs]]&#039;&#039; (or &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Configuration &amp;gt; Language&#039;&#039; in Moodle 1.6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language strings for non-standard modules and plugins are generally contained in a &#039;&#039;lang&#039;&#039; folder within the module or plugin folder. For sites which have migrated to UTF-8, it may be necessary to re-name the folder e.g. &#039;&#039;en&#039;&#039; should be re-named &#039;&#039;en_utf8&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I find the version of Moodle currently installed?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the [[Moodle version]] information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I repair a corrupted Moodle database?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, you might see an error message like &#039;./moodle/mdl_quiz_grades&#039; is marked as crashed and should be repaired. See [[How to check your database for corruption]] for the solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My site is stuck in maintenance mode==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes Moodle gets stuck in maintenance mode and you&#039;ll see the message &amp;quot;This site is undergoing maintenance and is currently unavailable&amp;quot; despite your attempts to turn-off maintenance mode. When you put Moodle into maintenance mode it creates a file called maintenance.html in moodledata/1/maintenance.html (the site files folder). To fix this try the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check that the web server user has write permissions to the moodledata folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manually delete the maintenance.html file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incomplete page displayed when I click &amp;quot;Turn Editing On&amp;quot;==&lt;br /&gt;
When you see an incomplete page, it is normally a sign that an error occurred. To find out more, turn on [[Debugging]], and you should see an error message which may help you to diagnose the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is usually as a result of an incompatible contributed module or block that you have installed. Follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the module removal instructions in [[Installing contributed modules or plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Re-visit your course page and try clicking on the &amp;quot;Turn Editing On&amp;quot; button again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you find an incompatible module or block, please report the problem to the person named as the maintainer in the [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6009 Modules and Plugins database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;quot;a required parameter (id) was missing&amp;quot; when uploading a file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This message sometimes is generated when attempting to upload a file larger than the upload limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the URL of the moodle service==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should configure your Apache server, at httpd.conf, using Listen, Port and DocumentRoot directives and Directory section. After restarting Apache, you also must open config.php in a text editor, and change the line:&lt;br /&gt;
    $CFG-&amp;gt;wwwroot   = &#039;http://mydomain/testmoodle&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Moodle site will also contain absolute links to resources which point to the previous URL. To change this see the [[Moodle_migration#Migrating_a_complete_Moodle_site | migrating a complete Moodle site]] instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;See also&#039;&#039;&#039;: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51667 Forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is the Moodle Registration button still displayed after I register my site?==&lt;br /&gt;
The registration button is provided so that you can place your moodle site to the http://www.moodle.org/sites list. Before registering, the button is displayed at the top of the Site Administration -&amp;gt; Notifications page. Once you have successfully registered, this is moved to the bottom of the same page. The button remains there so that you can update the details of your registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the registration process fails for some reason to complete fully, there are two methods of letting your local Moodle install know that you have registered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The preferred method is to use your mysql client program to execute these commands (assuming your Moodle database is called &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; USE moodle;&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; INSERT INTO mdl_config (name,value) VALUES (&#039;registered&#039;,unix_timestamp());&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Alternatively, edit your &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;moodle/config.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; file and add this line:&lt;br /&gt;
 $CFG-&amp;gt;registered = &#039;9999999999&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that this line in your config.php will stop the reminders about re-registering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an explanation of the idea behind the button see [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-7359 MDL-7359] in the moodle tracker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an explanation of how sites are checked see [[Verification_of_sites_on_moodle.org | the site verification page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable/disable debugging?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Debugging]]. If you are getting a blank or partially complete page, it is probably a sign that an error is occurring. Turning on debugging will let you see what the error message is, which may help you diagnose the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I cannot login to the Moodle CVS servers==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When attempting to login to the Moodle CVS servers, you may receive a &amp;quot;login aborted&amp;quot; error as shown below (this example shows the eu cvs server, with the command in bold):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 C:\gnuwin32&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;cvs -d:pserver:anonymous@eu.cvs.moodle.org:/cvsroot/moodle login&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Logging in to :pserver:anonymous@eu.cvs.moodle.org:2401/cvsroot/moodle&lt;br /&gt;
 CVS password: &amp;lt;- (blank password entered)&lt;br /&gt;
 cvs [login aborted]: connect to uk.cvs.moodle.org(212.219.207.198):2401 failed:&lt;br /&gt;
 Connection refused&lt;br /&gt;
 C:\gnuwin32&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this problem, check that you have entered the CVS command correctly and that port 2401 is open on your firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is a page blank, or half missing?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank page, or a page that seems to have half missing, is normally a sign that an error occurred. If (as is recommended on production systems) you have display of error messages turned off, it can be very hard to understand what is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The solution is to [[Debugging|turn on the debugging options]] temporarily. Then, when you go back to the problem page, you should see the error message. Once you had finished solving the problem, remember to turn debugging off again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I fix just one bug, without upgrading my whole site?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose:&lt;br /&gt;
* You are experiencing a particular bug.&lt;br /&gt;
* You have searched in the [http://tracker.moodle.org/ tracker], and found that your problem is MDL-abc, and that it has been fixed in the latest version.&lt;br /&gt;
* For some reason, you cannot upgrade your whole site, even though the latest version probably has security fixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, how can you get the fix for just this one bug, without upgrading your whole site? Well, if you are prepared to manually patch the code, you can probably get this information from the tracker. Please see [[How to fix just one bug without upgrading|this guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change centre of the Front Page from course categories to something else?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Front Page &amp;gt; Settings and change &amp;quot;Front page&amp;quot; to None all down. Change &amp;quot;Front page items when logged in&amp;quot; to None all down. Ensure that &amp;quot;Include a topic section&amp;quot; is checked. Save changes and return to the front page. Turn editing on, obviously, and you should now see the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down combo-boxes. Select &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; and select &amp;quot;Insert a label&amp;quot;. You can then edit the label in any way you want to in the WYSYWYG editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the initial login screen?==&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
Edit one of the language files.  &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site  administration &amp;gt; Language&amp;gt; Language customisation&#039;&#039;, look in the moodle.php file.  Look for &#039;&#039;loginusing&#039;&#039;  or &#039;&#039;loginsteps&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;loginstepsnone&#039;&#039; string variables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the initial login screen help?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change or add a help message for the login go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Authentication &amp;gt; Manage authentication.&#039;&#039; Type your help message in there in the&#039;&#039; Instructions&#039;&#039; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Users can not login, they need cookies and debug mentions config.php==&lt;br /&gt;
Your site&#039;s [[Configuration file|config.php file]] probably has extra lines.  There should be &#039;&#039;&#039;no spaces or lines after the final ?&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Hint: Sometimes blank lines are hard to see. Make sure they are not there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==After using the &#039;Login as&#039; function, why am I logged out of Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After using the &#039;Login as&#039; function, for security reasons you are automatically logged out of Moodle when you return to your normal role. If you login again you will be redirected to the page that you were on previously. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Errors FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installation FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Administration hacks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Beginning_Moodle_2.0_Administration|Beginning Moodle 2.0 Administration FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:FAQ Administración]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ d&#039;administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Administration FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=External_database_enrolment&amp;diff=97642</id>
		<title>External database enrolment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=External_database_enrolment&amp;diff=97642"/>
		<updated>2012-05-10T07:54:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Clarifying field information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Enrolment}}&lt;br /&gt;
Location: External database edit settings link in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use a external database (of nearly any kind) to control your enrolments. It is assumed your external database contains a field containing a course ID, a field containing a user ID, and optionally a field containing a role. These are compared against fields that you choose in the local course, user tables, and role tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following are the supported data sources, but note that you will need to have to compiled PHP with the appropriate options or through [[ODBC]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*access&lt;br /&gt;
*ado&lt;br /&gt;
*mssql&lt;br /&gt;
*borland_ibase&lt;br /&gt;
*csv&lt;br /&gt;
*db2&lt;br /&gt;
*fbsql&lt;br /&gt;
*firebird&lt;br /&gt;
*ibase&lt;br /&gt;
*informix72&lt;br /&gt;
*informix&lt;br /&gt;
*mysql&lt;br /&gt;
*mysqlt&lt;br /&gt;
*oci805&lt;br /&gt;
*oci8&lt;br /&gt;
*oci8po&lt;br /&gt;
*odbc&lt;br /&gt;
*odbc_mssql&lt;br /&gt;
*odbc_oracle&lt;br /&gt;
*oracle&lt;br /&gt;
*postgres64&lt;br /&gt;
*postgres7&lt;br /&gt;
*postgres&lt;br /&gt;
*proxy&lt;br /&gt;
*sqlanywhere&lt;br /&gt;
*sybase&lt;br /&gt;
*vfp&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enrolment &amp;amp; Unenrolment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External database enrolment happens at the moment when a user logs into Moodle. The plugin will attempt to automatically enrol the student in all their courses according to the data in the external database and, optionally, create empty courses where they do not already exist. To check if it is working, you can log in as a student and then check that their list of courses is as you would expect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process also unenrols users from courses if they are no longer in the database. User records are marked according to their original enrolment method. Therefore the external database plugin can only unenrol users who were enroled by the plugin in the first place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hidden Courses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Courses that are set to &amp;quot;Course is not available to students&amp;quot; can be ignored for enrolment purposes by setting the &amp;quot;enrol_db_ignorehiddencourse&amp;quot; to &#039;&#039;&#039;yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enrolment &amp;amp; Roles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;enrol_db_defaultcourseroleid&amp;quot; setting in the plugin settings page specifies the role that the user will take when they are added to the course. The default setting will set them to the course default setting (initially &amp;quot;student&amp;quot;). However, you can specify a field in the external table (specified in the &amp;quot;enrol_db_remoterolefield&amp;quot; setting) that contains the short name for the user&#039;s role. This could, for example, be used to enrol both students and teachers into courses using a suitably configured database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating Courses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally courses that do not exist in the Moodle site can be created. Switch the &amp;quot;enrol_db_autocreate&amp;quot; option to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; in the plugin settings. You can additionally specify the Category into which the new course will be placed and may also specify a &amp;quot;template&amp;quot; course from which the new course will be copied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Synchronization Script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A script is provided that can synchronize all your user enrollments at once - both adding and removing user enrolments (and creating courses if specified). The script is called enrol_database_sync.php and is found in the enrol/database folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This script is meant to be called from a system cronjob to sync moodle enrolments with enrolments in the external database. You need to make sure all the users present in the external enrolments are already created in moodle. If you are using external authentication plugins (db, ldap, etc.) you can use the scripts provided by those plugins to synchronize your users before running this script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example cron entry for Moodle 2.0&lt;br /&gt;
    # 5 minutes past 4am&lt;br /&gt;
    5 4 * * * /usr/bin/php -c /path/to/php.ini /path/to/moodle/enrol/database/cli/sync.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a large number of enrolments, you may want to raise the memory limits by passing -d memory_limit=256M&lt;br /&gt;
* For debugging &amp;amp; better logging, you are encouraged to use in the command line: -d log_errors=1 -d error_reporting=E_ALL -d display_errors=0 -d html_errors=0&lt;br /&gt;
* This only works for users that already exist in your Moodle site (see comment above)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up enrolment sync (How to) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to perform (as a minimum) the following steps to enable external database enrolment - only a single table is required in the database which contains a record for every user/course combination. If the table is large it is a good idea to make sure appropriate indexes have been created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use an existing database or create a new one. Use an existing table or create a new one with the following minimum fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*# A unique course identifier to match one of the following fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;idnumber&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s course table (varchar 100), which is manually specified as the &amp;quot;Course ID number&amp;quot; when editing a course&#039;s settings&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;shortname&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s course table (varchar 255), which is manually specified as the &amp;quot;Course short name&amp;quot; when editing a course&#039;s settings&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;id&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s course table (int 10), which is based on course creation order&lt;br /&gt;
*# A unique user identifier to match one of the following fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;idnumber&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s user table (varchar 255), which is manually specified as the &amp;quot;ID number&amp;quot; when editing a user&#039;s profile&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;username&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s user table (varchar 100), which is manually specified as the &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; when editing a user&#039;s profile&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s user table (varchar 100), which is manually specified as the &amp;quot;Email address&amp;quot; when editing a user&#039;s profile&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;id&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s user table (int 10), which is based on user creation order&lt;br /&gt;
*# (optional) A unique role identifier to match one of the following fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;shortnname&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s role table (varchar 100), for example editingteacher, coursecreator, student, ...&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;name&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s role table (varchar 255), for example Teacher, Course creator, Student, ...&lt;br /&gt;
*#* the &amp;quot;id&amp;quot; field in Moodle&#039;s role table (int 10), which is based on initial installation and new role creation order&lt;br /&gt;
* Populate the database table. Each user/course combination to have a record in the table.&lt;br /&gt;
* In Moodle, go to Site administration =&amp;gt; Plugins =&amp;gt; Enrolments =&amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins, find External Database in the list, enable it (click the closed-eye icon) and click Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the top panel, select the database type (make sure you have the necessary configuration in PHP for that type) and then supply the information to connect to the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* The middle panel creates the mapping between Moodle and the external database. The first three settings are for the local (Moodle) field names and the last three for the remote (external database) settings. They are in the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
** enrol_localcoursefield / enrol_remotecoursefield - in Moodle the name of the field in the course settings the uniquely identifies the course (e.g., idnumber). In the external database the name of the matching field.&lt;br /&gt;
** enrol_localuserfield / enrol_remoteuserfield - in Moodle the name of the field in the user profile that uniquely identified the user (e.g., idnumber). In the external database the name of the matching field.&lt;br /&gt;
** enrol_db_localrolefield / enrol_db_remoterolefield - (optional) in Moodle the name of the field in the role edit page the uniquely identifies the role (e.g., shortname). In the external database the name of the matching field.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Roles panel specifies the role that the user will get in the course if their role is not specified in the external database.&lt;br /&gt;
* The final panel enables auto creation of courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Save changes, and then tick the box to enable external database enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database enrolment does not appear in the course enrolment drop down menu. Why? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course enrolment drop down menu only lists [[Enrolment_plugins#Interactive_enrolment|&#039;&#039;&#039;interactive&#039;&#039;&#039; enrolment plugins]]. External database enrolment is not such a plugin, so it doesn&#039;t appear in the list. Similarly, the &amp;quot;Course Enrollable&amp;quot; setting (in the Course Settings) page also only applies to interactive enrolment plugins and has no effect on external database enrollment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this writing, the only interactive enrolment plugins are &#039;&#039;manual&#039;&#039; (also know as &#039;&#039;internal&#039;&#039;), &#039;&#039;paypal&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;authorize.net&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Field Mapping Example: ==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your fields from the Moodle database:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_localcoursefield:  A course identifier from mdl_course, e.g. &amp;quot;idnumber&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_localuserfield: A user identifier from mdl_user, e.g. &amp;quot;idnumber&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_localrolefield: (optional) A role identifier from mdl_role, e.g. &amp;quot;shortname&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a view in your external database which matches the chosen field values from Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_remotecoursefield: A matching course identifier from your external database table, e.g. &amp;quot;course_number&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_remoteuserfield: A matching user identifier from your external database table, e.g. &amp;quot;userid&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*enrol_remoterolefield: (optional) A matching role identifier from your external database table, e.g. &amp;quot;role_name&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Potential Gotchas ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It almost goes without saying that the integrity of the external database is important. If data is missing from the database then there is a potential for users being unenrolled from some or all of their courses. The unenrollment process will remove them from any group assignments and also poll each module type to give the module the option of removing that user&#039;s data if appropriate (for example, however, forum posts are never deleted). It is therefore prudent that you take the utmost care to ensure that the data in the external bass is correct at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Minor Security Issue&#039;&#039;&#039; Consider that if the ID field you use to identify your students is editable by the students (in their profile), then there is a potential for them changing this to the id of another valid student and gaining access to resources that they should not. However, they will still appear as themselves, they cannot impersonate the other user or otherwise gain access to their resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Errors and Diagnostics==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plugin produces a number of diagnostic messages and/or errors which are recorded to the PHP error log (as defined in the php.ini file). In addition messages about courses that are in the database for the user but that do not exist in the Moodle site will only be produced if debugging is set to ALL or DEVELOPER.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=49475 MySQL enrolment plugin doesn&#039;t seem to work] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74133 Someone explain external database enrolment, please??] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
*Example Setup [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Talk:External_database_enrolment#Example_External_Enrollment] Example Database Enrollment Setup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Matriculación Base de Datos Externa]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Base de données externe]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einschreibung über externe Datenbank]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:外部データベース登録]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Internet_Information_Services&amp;diff=97606</id>
		<title>Internet Information Services</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Internet_Information_Services&amp;diff=97606"/>
		<updated>2012-05-09T04:19:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding capture of settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}[[Internet Information Services]] (&#039;&#039;&#039;IIS&#039;&#039;&#039;) is the web server software bundled with Windows Server, as well as certain client versions of Windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PHP installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is strongly recommended to use only the official Microsoft PHP installer from http://php.iis.net/, it automatically installs all necessary components and facilitates easy configuration with PHP manager. Manual installation attempts often fail or may not allow Moodle to function properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately IIS does not natively support unicode characters in so called &#039;&#039;slashargument URL&#039;&#039; which are used in Moodle for file serving. Moodle requires manual configuration of rewrite rules, the PHP installation via &#039;&#039;Microsoft Web Platform Installer&#039;&#039; installs necessary &#039;&#039;URL Rewrite 2.0&#039;&#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rewrite_rule_-_Internet_Information_Services_(IIS)_Manager.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add following rewrite rule to enable support for unicode file names in Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Matches the Pattern - Regular Expressions - &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;^([^\?]+?\.php)(\/.+)$&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Action - Rewrite - &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{R:1}\?file={R:2}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - Append query string&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Directory permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default IIS account is &#039;&#039;IIS_IUSRS&#039;&#039;, make sure it has appropriate access right to Moodle dirroot (read only) and dataroot (read/write) directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Debugging problems==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default IIS contains custom error pages that intentionally hide error details on production sites. When diagnosing problems you may want to disable temporarily the IIS Error Pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.iis.net  The Official Microsoft IIS Site]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_Information_Services Wikipedia article on IIS]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://php.iis.net/ PHP installer for IIS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:IIS]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Rewrite_rule_-_Internet_Information_Services_(IIS)_Manager.png&amp;diff=97605</id>
		<title>Plik:Rewrite rule - Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Plik:Rewrite_rule_-_Internet_Information_Services_(IIS)_Manager.png&amp;diff=97605"/>
		<updated>2012-05-09T04:16:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=97264</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=97264"/>
		<updated>2012-04-26T05:28:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Allow theme changes in the URL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can  preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. Theme names should be in lower case with spaces replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. Currently all themes that are provided with Moodle 2.0 support this custom menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and  items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label, if you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on this setting please see the &#039;&#039;Using Moodle&#039;&#039; forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=149803 Moodle 2.0: Custom menu in core]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable device detection===&lt;br /&gt;
Will detect mobile and tablets that identify themselves via the web browser at the time of login to Moodle.   These work with the theme selector.  When the theme selector has identified a default, mobile and tablet themes, this feature will use that theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device detection regular expressions===&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to customize the theme selector options.   For example, you can add a custom theme for IE6 and another for Windows CE by entering the identifying expressions the browser sends and the &amp;quot;Return value&amp;quot; you want to display as the theme selectors &amp;quot;Device type&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special themes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Session themes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle offers an additional way to set a theme - the &#039;&#039;&#039;session theme&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is set with the URL and lasts until you log out. When you next login, the site/course/user themes are active again. This option is great for theme testing and works perfectly when you want to enable different themes for different situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example you can offer a special link for PDA users and integrate the session theme &#039;&#039;orangewhitepda&#039;&#039; in that link. Nobody needs to change any settings, you just click on that link. The session theme is called by the URL parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The whole URL  without the session theme could look like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and with the parameter for the PDA theme like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a standard Moodle installation, session themes are not active. To activate them the administrator must add the parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;allowthemechangeonurl = true;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the Moodle &#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039; file in the Moodle base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default  hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default it is set to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;page&#039;, &#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logo, tagline, link colour, column width, custom CSS and other settings for a particular theme may be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme name&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mCVsJ3Wsoj8 Video demonstrating how to set a category theme in Moodle 1.9]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Configuration des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=97263</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=97263"/>
		<updated>2012-04-26T05:28:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding information about theme URLs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can  preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme={theme_name}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. Theme names should be in lower case with spaces replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. Currently all themes that are provided with Moodle 2.0 support this custom menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and  items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label, if you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on this setting please see the &#039;&#039;Using Moodle&#039;&#039; forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=149803 Moodle 2.0: Custom menu in core]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable device detection===&lt;br /&gt;
Will detect mobile and tablets that identify themselves via the web browser at the time of login to Moodle.   These work with the theme selector.  When the theme selector has identified a default, mobile and tablet themes, this feature will use that theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device detection regular expressions===&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to customize the theme selector options.   For example, you can add a custom theme for IE6 and another for Windows CE by entering the identifying expressions the browser sends and the &amp;quot;Return value&amp;quot; you want to display as the theme selectors &amp;quot;Device type&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special themes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Session themes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle offers an additional way to set a theme - the &#039;&#039;&#039;session theme&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is set with the URL and lasts until you log out. When you next login, the site/course/user themes are active again. This option is great for theme testing and works perfectly when you want to enable different themes for different situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example you can offer a special link for PDA users and integrate the session theme &#039;&#039;orangewhitepda&#039;&#039; in that link. Nobody needs to change any settings, you just click on that link. The session theme is called by the URL parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The whole URL  without the session theme could look like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and with the parameter for the PDA theme like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a standard Moodle installation, session themes are not active. To activate them the administrator must add the parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;allowthemechangeonurl = true;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the Moodle &#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039; file in the Moodle base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default  hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default it is set to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;page&#039;, &#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logo, tagline, link colour, column width, custom CSS and other settings for a particular theme may be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme name&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mCVsJ3Wsoj8 Video demonstrating how to set a category theme in Moodle 1.9]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Configuration des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96899</id>
		<title>Installing Oracle for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96899"/>
		<updated>2012-04-12T03:23:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Shifting PHP instructions to earlier section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/articles/technote-php-instant-084410.html&lt;br /&gt;
* http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488#p308002 (with attached html document)&lt;br /&gt;
* http://es.php.net/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Broken versions of OCI8 driver ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PHP v5.2.4 (and perhaps v5.2.3 as well) have shipped with a bug in the OCI8 driver that leaks statement handles. The version of the OCI8 driver with the bug is v1.2.4. Possible workarounds:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Upgrade to PHP v5.2.5 or later&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade to PHP v5.2.1 (reported to work)&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade only the oci8 driver to the one included in PHP 5.2.1 (it worked for us -- iarenaza)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are on linux and/or can compile PECL extensions, install an older OCI8 driver (v1.2.3 seems to work) from the PECL repository http://pecl.php.net/package/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information at&lt;br /&gt;
* http://bugs.php.net/bug.php?id=42496 -- tracking the PHP OCI8 bug&lt;br /&gt;
* http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-11429 -- diagnostics on the Moodle side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing Moodle on Windows with Oracle Express Edition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to install Moodle with Oracle Express Edition on Windows. I&#039;m using it for &#039;&#039;&#039;debugging&#039;&#039;&#039; purpose. It&#039;s definitively not a production environment. The goal is to setup easily and quickly a Moodle/Windows/Oracle environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Oracle ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Download Oracle Express Edition on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/database/xe/index.html Oracle web site].&lt;br /&gt;
# You will also need the Instant client [http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/tech/oci/instantclient/htdocs/winsoft.html from here] (free account sign up needed). Copy everything from the unzipped folder into apache/bin.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install both.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access to the oracle console at http://127.0.0.1:8080/apex (Login=SYS Password=the_one_you_entered_during_the_installation).&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a new user and give it all rights (including DBA).&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the SQL Commands page and grant your new user the dmbs_lock permission...&amp;lt;code sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
grant execute on dbms_lock to XXXXX;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;...where XXXXX is the username of your new user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log out and log in as the new user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the script found in the Moodle codebase at /lib/dml/oci_native_moodle_package.sql. If you can not run this script directly, you can run its parts (separated by slashes) independently via the SQL Commands page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Oracle Express Edition 10g is limited at one database called &#039;XE&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set up your Oracle extension ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document does not explain how to setup apache/php for Oracle. You can have more information on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/tech/php/htdocs/php-oracle-tutorial.html Oracle Documentation].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit your phi.ini file, uncomment the following line (remove the leading semicolon) and set the value to zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
oci8.statement_cache_size = 0&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uncomment the php_oci8 extension. In a WAMP setup, this is listed as...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
extension=php_oci8.dll&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also need to uncomment php_oracle, php_pdo_oci, php_pdo_oci8 in some set-ups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Moodle ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the database setup page:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Driver: Oracle oci8 (in the config file it should read &amp;quot;oci8po&amp;quot; for a 1.9.x install and &amp;quot;oci&amp;quot; for a 2.0.x install)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Host: empty the field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Database: //localhost:1521/XE&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
User: the user that you created&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Password: the password you gave to the user&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure Apache ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re running Moodle on Oracle with Apache on Linux, you might have issues with PHP being able to see the system environment variables.  To resolve this, you can edit /etc/sysconfig/apache2 and add the following lines to the bottom:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/oracle/instantclient_11_2# Set LANG Variables for UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_LANG=AMERICAN_AMERICA.AL32UTF8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LANG=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_COLLATE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_CTYPE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MESSAGES=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MONETARY=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_NUMERIC=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_TIME=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS=&#039;.,&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
export LANG LC_ALL LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE LC_MESSAGES LC_MONETARY LC_NUMERIC LC_TIM NLS_LANG LD_LIBRARY_PATH NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also need to add those two lines to ~/.bashrc so that the PHP command-line client can see it too. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related links ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lewiscarr.co.uk/node/4 Installing ORACLE drivers with PHP]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Installing MSSQL for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134729#p588963 Can i install Moodle with Oracle database]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488 Who uses Oracle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Step-by-step_Install_Guide_for_Solaris_10_with_Oracle_10 Step by step Install Guide for Solaris 10 with Oracle 10]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://learningischange.com/2009/05/29/install-moodle-on-an-oracle-database-in-25-minutes-or-less/ Install Moodle on an Oracle Database (in 25 minutes or less)]. The related Using Moodle forum discussion is [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=124629 here].&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.mguhlin.org/2009/05/moodle-on-oracle-database.html Moodle on Oracle Database] discussion on Miguel Guhlin&#039;s blog &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Developer]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96898</id>
		<title>Installing Oracle for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96898"/>
		<updated>2012-04-12T03:17:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding additional setup instructions&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/articles/technote-php-instant-084410.html&lt;br /&gt;
* http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488#p308002 (with attached html document)&lt;br /&gt;
* http://es.php.net/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Broken versions of OCI8 driver ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PHP v5.2.4 (and perhaps v5.2.3 as well) have shipped with a bug in the OCI8 driver that leaks statement handles. The version of the OCI8 driver with the bug is v1.2.4. Possible workarounds:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Upgrade to PHP v5.2.5 or later&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade to PHP v5.2.1 (reported to work)&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade only the oci8 driver to the one included in PHP 5.2.1 (it worked for us -- iarenaza)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are on linux and/or can compile PECL extensions, install an older OCI8 driver (v1.2.3 seems to work) from the PECL repository http://pecl.php.net/package/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information at&lt;br /&gt;
* http://bugs.php.net/bug.php?id=42496 -- tracking the PHP OCI8 bug&lt;br /&gt;
* http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-11429 -- diagnostics on the Moodle side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing Moodle on Windows with Oracle Express Edition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to install Moodle with Oracle Express Edition on Windows. I&#039;m using it for &#039;&#039;&#039;debugging&#039;&#039;&#039; purpose. It&#039;s definitively not a production environment. The goal is to setup easily and quickly a Moodle/Windows/Oracle environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Oracle ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Download Oracle Express Edition on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/database/xe/index.html Oracle web site].&lt;br /&gt;
# You will also need the Instant client [http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/tech/oci/instantclient/htdocs/winsoft.html from here] (free account sign up needed). Copy everything from the unzipped folder into apache/bin.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install both.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Access to the oracle console at http://127.0.0.1:8080/apex (Login=SYS Password=the_one_you_entered_during_the_installation).&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a new user and give it all rights (including DBA).&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the SQL Commands page and grant your new user the dmbs_lock permission...&amp;lt;code sql&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
grant execute on dbms_lock to XXXXX;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;...where XXXXX is the username of your new user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Log out and log in as the new user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the script found in the Moodle codebase at /lib/dml/oci_native_moodle_package.sql. If you can not run this script directly, you can run its parts (separated by slashes) independently via the SQL Commands page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Oracle Express Edition 10g is limited at one database called &#039;XE&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set up your oracle extension ===&lt;br /&gt;
This document does not explain how to setup apache/php for Oracle. You can have more information on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/tech/php/htdocs/php-oracle-tutorial.html Oracle Documentation]. On my own machine I used my WAMP installation ([http://www.en.wampserver.com/ Wampserver 2.0]) which allowed me to activate all oracle extensions in few clicks (php_oci8, php_oracle, php_pdo_oci, php_pdo_oci8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Moodle ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the database setup page:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Driver: Oracle oci8 (in the config file it should read &amp;quot;oci8po&amp;quot; for a 1.9.x install and &amp;quot;oci&amp;quot; for a 2.0.x install)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Host: empty the field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Database: //localhost:1521/XE&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
User: the user that you created&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Password: the password you gave to the user&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure Apache ===&lt;br /&gt;
Edit your phi.ini file, uncomment the following line (remove the leading semicolon) and set the value to zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
oci8.statement_cache_size = 0&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re running Moodle on Oracle with Apache on Linux, you might have issues with PHP being able to see the system environment variables.  To resolve this, you can edit /etc/sysconfig/apache2 and add the following lines to the bottom:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/oracle/instantclient_11_2# Set LANG Variables for UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_LANG=AMERICAN_AMERICA.AL32UTF8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LANG=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_COLLATE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_CTYPE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MESSAGES=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MONETARY=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_NUMERIC=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_TIME=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS=&#039;.,&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
export LANG LC_ALL LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE LC_MESSAGES LC_MONETARY LC_NUMERIC LC_TIM NLS_LANG LD_LIBRARY_PATH NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also need to add those two lines to ~/.bashrc so that the PHP command-line client can see it too. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related links ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lewiscarr.co.uk/node/4 Installing ORACLE drivers with PHP]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Installing MSSQL for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134729#p588963 Can i install Moodle with Oracle database]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488 Who uses Oracle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Step-by-step_Install_Guide_for_Solaris_10_with_Oracle_10 Step by step Install Guide for Solaris 10 with Oracle 10]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://learningischange.com/2009/05/29/install-moodle-on-an-oracle-database-in-25-minutes-or-less/ Install Moodle on an Oracle Database (in 25 minutes or less)]. The related Using Moodle forum discussion is [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=124629 here].&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.mguhlin.org/2009/05/moodle-on-oracle-database.html Moodle on Oracle Database] discussion on Miguel Guhlin&#039;s blog &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Developer]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96897</id>
		<title>Installing Oracle for PHP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Installing_Oracle_for_PHP&amp;diff=96897"/>
		<updated>2012-04-12T03:06:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding setting change to satisfy unit tests&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/articles/technote-php-instant-084410.html&lt;br /&gt;
* http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488#p308002 (with attached html document)&lt;br /&gt;
* http://es.php.net/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Broken versions of OCI8 driver ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PHP v5.2.4 (and perhaps v5.2.3 as well) have shipped with a bug in the OCI8 driver that leaks statement handles. The version of the OCI8 driver with the bug is v1.2.4. Possible workarounds:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Upgrade to PHP v5.2.5 or later&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade to PHP v5.2.1 (reported to work)&lt;br /&gt;
* Downgrade only the oci8 driver to the one included in PHP 5.2.1 (it worked for us -- iarenaza)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are on linux and/or can compile PECL extensions, install an older OCI8 driver (v1.2.3 seems to work) from the PECL repository http://pecl.php.net/package/oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information at&lt;br /&gt;
* http://bugs.php.net/bug.php?id=42496 -- tracking the PHP OCI8 bug&lt;br /&gt;
* http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-11429 -- diagnostics on the Moodle side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing Moodle on Windows with Oracle Express Edition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to install Moodle with Oracle Express Edition on Windows. I&#039;m using it for &#039;&#039;&#039;debugging&#039;&#039;&#039; purpose. It&#039;s definitively not a production environment. The goal is to setup easily and quickly a Moodle/Windows/Oracle environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Oracle ===&lt;br /&gt;
Download Oracle Express Edition on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/database/xe/index.html Oracle web site].&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You will also need the Instant client [http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/tech/oci/instantclient/htdocs/winsoft.html from here] (free account sign up needed). Copy everything from the unzipped folder into apache/bin. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Install both.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Access to the oracle console (http://127.0.0.1:8080/apex). Login: SYS Password: the_one_you_entered_during_the_installation&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new user and give it all rights (including DBA).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Oracle Express Edition 10g is limited at one database called &#039;XE&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set up your oracle extension ===&lt;br /&gt;
This document does not explain how to setup apache/php for Oracle. You can have more information on [http://www.oracle.com/technology/tech/php/htdocs/php-oracle-tutorial.html Oracle Documentation]. On my own machine I used my WAMP installation ([http://www.en.wampserver.com/ Wampserver 2.0]) which allowed me to activate all oracle extensions in few clicks (php_oci8, php_oracle, php_pdo_oci, php_pdo_oci8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install Moodle ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the database setup page:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Driver: Oracle oci8 (in the config file it should read &amp;quot;oci8po&amp;quot; for a 1.9.x install and &amp;quot;oci&amp;quot; for a 2.0.x install)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Host: empty the field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Database: //localhost:1521/XE&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
User: the user that you created&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Password: the password you gave to the user&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure Apache ===&lt;br /&gt;
Edit your phi.ini file, uncomment the following line (remove the leading semicolon) and set the value to zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
oci8.statement_cache_size = 0&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re running Moodle on Oracle with Apache on Linux, you might have issues with PHP being able to see the system environment variables.  To resolve this, you can edit /etc/sysconfig/apache2 and add the following lines to the bottom:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/oracle/instantclient_11_2# Set LANG Variables for UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_LANG=AMERICAN_AMERICA.AL32UTF8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LANG=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_COLLATE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_CTYPE=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MESSAGES=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_MONETARY=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_NUMERIC=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LC_TIME=en_US.UTF-8&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS=&#039;.,&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
export LANG LC_ALL LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE LC_MESSAGES LC_MONETARY LC_NUMERIC LC_TIM NLS_LANG LD_LIBRARY_PATH NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also need to add those two lines to ~/.bashrc so that the PHP command-line client can see it too. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related links ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lewiscarr.co.uk/node/4 Installing ORACLE drivers with PHP]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Installing MSSQL for PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PHP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134729#p588963 Can i install Moodle with Oracle database]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=65488 Who uses Oracle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Step-by-step_Install_Guide_for_Solaris_10_with_Oracle_10 Step by step Install Guide for Solaris 10 with Oracle 10]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://learningischange.com/2009/05/29/install-moodle-on-an-oracle-database-in-25-minutes-or-less/ Install Moodle on an Oracle Database (in 25 minutes or less)]. The related Using Moodle forum discussion is [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=124629 here].&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.mguhlin.org/2009/05/moodle-on-oracle-database.html Moodle on Oracle Database] discussion on Miguel Guhlin&#039;s blog &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Developer]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:XMLDB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:DB]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SQL databases]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=95546</id>
		<title>Progress Bar block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Progress_Bar_block&amp;diff=95546"/>
		<updated>2012-01-30T01:39:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Update for recent version&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Blocks|Back to Blocks page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ProgressBar.gif|right|A progress bar for a student]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The Progress Bar is a time-management tool for students.&lt;br /&gt;
* It visually shows what activities/resources a student is supposed to interact with in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is colour coded so students can quickly see what they have and have not completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher selects which pre-existing activities/resources are to be included in the Progress Bar and when they should be completed/viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_progress Block code in Plugins repository]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10489 Bug Tracker Page] (Please report bugs here)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cvs.moodle.org/contrib/plugins/blocks/progress/ CVS Repository]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Progress Bar block is added like other blocks ([[Installing_contributed_modules_or_plugins|How to install a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the progress bar is installed, you can use it in a course as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your activities/resources as normal&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the Progress Bar block to your page ([[Blocks|How to add a block]])&lt;br /&gt;
# Move your Progress Bar block into a prominent position, eg. top-left (click and drag the block title)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Configuration icon on the block below the title&lt;br /&gt;
# Give your Progress Bar block a title (default is &amp;quot;Progress Bar&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the activities/resources you want shown in the block to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the date and time when the activity/resource is expected to be completed/viewed by (some activities have deadlines set, if so, that deadline can be used or another can be set in the Progress Bar block configuration)&lt;br /&gt;
# Save changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden items will not appear in the Progress Bar until they are unhidden. This is useful for a scheduled release of activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Thanks to:&lt;br /&gt;
** Toshimi Hatanaka for contributing a Japanese translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Yvonne Schneider and Joachim Vogelgesang for contributing a German translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Maria João Spilker for contributing a Portuguese-Brazilian translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Pieter Wolters for contributing a Dutch translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fernando Sánchez for contributing a Spanish translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Fabien Sartoretti for contributing a French translation&lt;br /&gt;
** Adam Levy for contributing queries and strings for Hot Potatoes support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=WebDAV_repository&amp;diff=95047</id>
		<title>WebDAV repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=WebDAV_repository&amp;diff=95047"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:44:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) is a set of methods based on the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) that facilitates collaboration between users in editing and managing documents and files stored on World Wide Web servers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A WebDAV repository can be enabled by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage repositories&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WebDAV configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After enabling the WebDAV repository, a repository instance can be created in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; WebDAV repository&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Webdav config.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV type: Choose from HTTP or HTTPS connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server: The server name &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV path: The path to webdav directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authentication: We currently only support HTTP Basic Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server port: The webdav server port&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server user: HTTP Basic authentication username&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server password: HTTP Basic authentication password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are going to added an webdav server at http://webdavserver.tld/path/to/dir, you should use following options:&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV type: HTTP&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV Server: webdavserver.tld&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring WebDAV on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 (Service Pack 2), IIS V6.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure Windows Server 2003 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to install WebDAV on the server. &#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; when you promote a basic Windows Server 2003 installation to an application server, it installs various IIS 6 components but WebDAV isn’t one of them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Install and Enable WebDAV on the Server ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install WebDAV on the IIS 6 machine, use Add or Remove Programs in Control Panel and run the Windows Components Wizard. You can find WebDAV under &#039;&#039;&#039;Application Server -&amp;gt; Internet Information Services -&amp;gt; World Wide Web Service -&amp;gt; WebDAV Publishing&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once WebDAV is installed it needs to be enabled. Check the WebDAV option under the Web Service Extensions node in IIS Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure IIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring a new virtual directory in IIS is a two-step process:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new virtual directory using the Virtual Directory wizard&lt;br /&gt;
#Configure the access permissions on the new virtual directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Create New Virtual Directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Open IIS and right-click on your Moodle website. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;New -&amp;gt; Virtual Directory&#039;&#039;&#039;... from the pop-up menu.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:New_virtual_directory.png|200 px|Menu option required for creating new virtual directory]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;New -&amp;gt; Virtual directory...&#039;&#039;&#039; from the pop-up menu. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Create New Virtual Directory Wizard&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Wizard_intro.png|200 px|IIS Virtual Directory Creation Wizard]] &lt;br /&gt;
#Call the new virtual directory &#039;&#039;&#039;Moodledata&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Name_directory.png|200 px|alt text]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Specify the path to the Moodledata directory.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Choose_path.png|200 px|Choosing path to folder on server]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the new virtual directory has &#039;&#039;&#039;Read&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Write&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse&#039;&#039;&#039; permissions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Directory_permissions.png|200 px|Specifying directory permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the Finish button to create the new virtual directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring Virtual Directory Properties ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click on the new virtual directory and select Properties from the pop-up menu.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Check_properties.png|200 px|Checking new virtual directory properties]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that &#039;&#039;&#039;Read&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Write&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Directory browsing&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Log visits&#039;&#039;&#039; are checked. Ensure &#039;&#039;&#039;Index this resource&#039;&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Properties_view.png|200 px|Virtual directory properties correctly configured]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Directory Security&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and press the &#039;&#039;&#039;Authentication and access control&#039;&#039;&#039; Edit... button&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Authentication_tab.png|200 px|Directory Security authentication and access control]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Authenticated access configuration will depend on your needs. Basic access will require you to uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable anonymous access&#039;&#039;&#039; and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Basic authentication (password is sent in clear text)&#039;&#039;&#039;. You may get a warning about security:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Authentication_warn.png|200 px|Directory security warning]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Your new virtual directory is ready for testing.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Final_view.png|200 px|New virtual directory ready for use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing WebDAV on Windows XP ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV needs to be enabled on any client machines that will be used to create and manage content for Moodle. Windows XP has a built-in WebDAV client service that needs to be enabled:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;Services&#039;&#039;&#039; console under &#039;&#039;&#039;Administrative Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; and find the &#039;&#039;&#039;WebClient&#039;&#039;&#039; service.&lt;br /&gt;
#Double-click on this service to open its &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Startup Type&#039;&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;, then click the Start button to start the service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Internet Explorer 8.0 no longer supports web folders. See [http://blogs.msdn.com/b/askie/archive/2009/03/20/open-as-web-folder-not-in-the-internet-explorer-8-file-open-dialog.aspx this blog post from David Conner] for details. Instead, you will need to map a network drive (instructions on mapping a network drive are also given in David&#039;s blog post).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV path: /path/to/dir/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Capabilities/repository/webdav:view|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-22663&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:WebDAV Repository]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/webdav:view&amp;diff=95046</id>
		<title>Capabilities/repository/webdav:view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/webdav:view&amp;diff=95046"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:30:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* This allows a user to access the [[WebDAV repository]].&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is set to allowed (CAP_ALLOW) by default for course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Server_files_repository&amp;diff=95045</id>
		<title>Server files repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Server_files_repository&amp;diff=95045"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:29:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Repository permissions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}The server repository allows users with the correct permissions to see files on the server.  This might mean only files and folders in the context of the current course, or access to a file system that will allow them to use other courses files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access any repository, click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File_Picker_blank_course.png|thumb|300px|center|A new course, with arrow point to  Server files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is an example of drilling down.  The breadcrumb path has built in links to the level it represents.  In the example below, click on &amp;quot;English&amp;quot; and you will see folders representing all the courses in the English category at demo.moodle.org .&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:File_Picker_demo_moodle_legacy_files.png|center|Server files after drilling down in demo.moodle.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Capabilities/repository/local:view|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/local:view&amp;diff=95044</id>
		<title>Capabilities/repository/local:view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/local:view&amp;diff=95044"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:29:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* This allows a user to access the [[Server files repository]].&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is set to allowed (CAP_ALLOW) by default for course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=95043</id>
		<title>File system repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=95043"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:28:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Repository permissions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
The file system repository allows users within Moodle to access files which have been uploaded via FTP into designated folders on the server.  A file system repository may be available site wide for everyone; within an individual course or for an individual user.(However - see this [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-28656  tracker entry] regarding course and individual repositories)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This must be done by a systems admin who  has write permissions to the server directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating  folders for your file system repositories===&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the moodledata folder on the server&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside it, create a folder  called &amp;quot;repository&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside that folder, create as many folders as you need, named appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Moodledatarepo2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*FTP into the appropriate folder the files you want. (The folders can hold all types of files)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enabling the File System repository plugin===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage Repositories&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select from the drop down next to File sytem &amp;quot;Enabled and visible&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filesystemrepo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a site-wide file system repository===&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the repository is enabled as above, click on the  &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down to Repositories instances of the site&lt;br /&gt;
*Click Create a repository instance&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitefilesystemrepo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and (if there are several folders on the server) choose from the dropdown the one you want. Click save&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Namedfilesystem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*It will now be available in the file picker in all courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Just repeat the process to get more than one site wide file system repository&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a repository inside a course===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE:  A regular user needs to have been given permission to do this by admin (MORE DETAILS SOON)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the desired course and click on “repositories” in the administration block&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Create File System instance&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Courseinstance.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up an individual file system repository instance===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: A regular user needs to have been given permission to do this by admin (MORE DETAILS SOON)&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the navigation block, click on “my profile”&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “repositories”&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click “create File System instance”&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This will create a personal file system repository connecting just you to a folder on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Privaterepo2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using it===&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to add a file in Moodle, then the File Picker should show you your new file system repository, and you should be able to browse it and select files to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that file types are respected (based on file extensions), so if you are adding an image in the editor, then you won&#039;t see Office docs (for example) appear in the File Picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filesystemeg.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[File_system_repository_FAQ|File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview of [[Repositories|Repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2010/06/15/ftp-files-into-moodle-2-0-with-the-repository-api/ FTP files into Moodle 2.0 with the repository API article from somerandomthoughts.com] including screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dateisystem-Repository]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view&amp;diff=95042</id>
		<title>Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view&amp;diff=95042"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:27:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* This allows a user to access the [[File system repository]].&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is set to allowed (CAP_ALLOW) by default for course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Legacy_course_files&amp;diff=95041</id>
		<title>Legacy course files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Legacy_course_files&amp;diff=95041"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:26:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Repository permissions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: This page only applies to sites which have been upgraded from Moodle 1.9.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.0 onwards, files are stored in separate areas, rather than together in the course files area. See [[Course files]] for a detailed explanation. When a site is upgraded from 1.9, the course files area is renamed &#039;Legacy course files&#039;. By default, this area is not available in new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;It is recommended that teachers make use of the new [[Repositories|repositories]] in Moodle 2.0 for storing course files, rather than saving them in the legacy course files area&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling legacy course files areas==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable a legacy course files area in a new course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable the legacy course files repository plugin in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; [[Manage repositories]]&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the legacyfilesinnewcourses box in the Manage repositories common settings then click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set &#039;Legacy course files&#039; to Yes in the course settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A legacy course files link will then appear in the &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration&#039;&#039; area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Capabilities/repository/coursefiles:view|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja: レガシーコースファイル]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/coursefiles:view&amp;diff=95040</id>
		<title>Capabilities/repository/coursefiles:view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Capabilities/repository/coursefiles:view&amp;diff=95040"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:25:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* This allows a user to access the [[Legacy course files]] area.&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is available in Moodle 2.0 onwards and replaces the capability moodle/course:managefiles.&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is set to allowed (CAP_ALLOW) by default for course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Capabilities|Repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Repositories]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Managing_repositories&amp;diff=95039</id>
		<title>Managing repositories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Managing_repositories&amp;diff=95039"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:20:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: /* Repositories and capabilities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling repositories==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repositories can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage repositories&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A repository plugin may be set to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabled and visible - appears in the file picker&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabled and hidden&lt;br /&gt;
* Disabled - default setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order in which repositories are shown in the file picker may be set using the up and down arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vocabulary==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Repository plugin&#039;&#039;&#039;: it is also called a repository type. It can be named Box.net, Flickr, Mahara, Youtube... Adding a plugin allow users to create instances of this plugin. Only instances are displayed into the file picker. Type only exist in order to let a Moodle administrator to deactivate/delete all instances of a type in one click.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Repository instance&#039;&#039;&#039;: An instance is displayed into the file picker and it is the access point to an external repository. An instance can have specific settings (for example be linked to a personal account).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*First case: when you add the plugin, an instance is automatically created and can not be edited. The Moodle administrator cannot change the instance name. The instance name displayed into the file picker will be exactly the same as the plugin name. For example Youtube, Box.net...&lt;br /&gt;
*Second case: the plugin allow the Moodle administrator to add multiple instances. An instance has a name for example Flickr Public access to Martin account, Martin&#039;s Mahara... &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;For this second case it is important to identify two different kind of instances:&lt;br /&gt;
#Common instances: The instances set by Moodle administrator in these same administration pages will be available into any file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
#Private instance: A teacher can set some instances available only for a course, and an user can set some instances only available for himself. In order to set instances for a course the teacher will go to the course page, and in order to set instances for a personal use, a user will go on his profile page. An administrator cannot add/edit private instances from the administration pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common repository settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common repository settings can be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Common Repository settings&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cache Expire===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify how long in seconds file listings are cached locally when browsing external repositories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow external links===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With some repositories such as Flickr, users can have the choice whether to copy the media into Moodle (the preferred solution) or to make a link to it instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Legacy course files in new courses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is not normally available in new courses as it is designed for upgraded 1.9 courses. However, if it is checked here then it will appear when new courses are created - but certain backup and restore features won&#039;t work with it. See [[Legacy course files]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repositories and capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each repository plugin has a [[Roles and permissions|capability]] to control user access. This can be controlled for users of differing [[Roles and permissions|roles]]. Most, repositories distributed with Moodle are accessible to all roles, except the following repositories, which by default are accessible to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/repository/coursefiles:view|Legacy course files]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view|File system]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/repository/local:view|Server files]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/repository/webdav:view|WebDAV repository]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=WebDAV_repository&amp;diff=95038</id>
		<title>WebDAV repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=WebDAV_repository&amp;diff=95038"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:02:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) is a set of methods based on the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) that facilitates collaboration between users in editing and managing documents and files stored on World Wide Web servers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A WebDAV repository can be enabled by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage repositories&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WebDAV configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After enabling the WebDAV repository, a repository instance can be created in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; WebDAV repository&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Webdav config.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV type: Choose from HTTP or HTTPS connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server: The server name &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV path: The path to webdav directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authentication: We currently only support HTTP Basic Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server port: The webdav server port&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server user: HTTP Basic authentication username&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV server password: HTTP Basic authentication password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are going to added an webdav server at http://webdavserver.tld/path/to/dir, you should use following options:&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV type: HTTP&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV Server: webdavserver.tld&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring WebDAV on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 (Service Pack 2), IIS V6.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure Windows Server 2003 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to install WebDAV on the server. &#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; when you promote a basic Windows Server 2003 installation to an application server, it installs various IIS 6 components but WebDAV isn’t one of them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Install and Enable WebDAV on the Server ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install WebDAV on the IIS 6 machine, use Add or Remove Programs in Control Panel and run the Windows Components Wizard. You can find WebDAV under &#039;&#039;&#039;Application Server -&amp;gt; Internet Information Services -&amp;gt; World Wide Web Service -&amp;gt; WebDAV Publishing&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once WebDAV is installed it needs to be enabled. Check the WebDAV option under the Web Service Extensions node in IIS Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure IIS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring a new virtual directory in IIS is a two-step process:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new virtual directory using the Virtual Directory wizard&lt;br /&gt;
#Configure the access permissions on the new virtual directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Create New Virtual Directory ====&lt;br /&gt;
#Open IIS and right-click on your Moodle website. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;New -&amp;gt; Virtual Directory&#039;&#039;&#039;... from the pop-up menu.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:New_virtual_directory.png|200 px|Menu option required for creating new virtual directory]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;New -&amp;gt; Virtual directory...&#039;&#039;&#039; from the pop-up menu. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Create New Virtual Directory Wizard&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Wizard_intro.png|200 px|IIS Virtual Directory Creation Wizard]] &lt;br /&gt;
#Call the new virtual directory &#039;&#039;&#039;Moodledata&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Name_directory.png|200 px|alt text]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Specify the path to the Moodledata directory.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Choose_path.png|200 px|Choosing path to folder on server]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the new virtual directory has &#039;&#039;&#039;Read&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Write&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse&#039;&#039;&#039; permissions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Directory_permissions.png|200 px|Specifying directory permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the Finish button to create the new virtual directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Configuring Virtual Directory Properties ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click on the new virtual directory and select Properties from the pop-up menu.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Check_properties.png|200 px|Checking new virtual directory properties]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that &#039;&#039;&#039;Read&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Write&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Directory browsing&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Log visits&#039;&#039;&#039; are checked. Ensure &#039;&#039;&#039;Index this resource&#039;&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Properties_view.png|200 px|Virtual directory properties correctly configured]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Directory Security&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and press the &#039;&#039;&#039;Authentication and access control&#039;&#039;&#039; Edit... button&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Authentication_tab.png|200 px|Directory Security authentication and access control]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Authenticated access configuration will depend on your needs. Basic access will require you to uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable anonymous access&#039;&#039;&#039; and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Basic authentication (password is sent in clear text)&#039;&#039;&#039;. You may get a warning about security:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Authentication_warn.png|200 px|Directory security warning]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Your new virtual directory is ready for testing.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[[Image:Final_view.png|200 px|New virtual directory ready for use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing WebDAV on Windows XP ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV needs to be enabled on any client machines that will be used to create and manage content for Moodle. Windows XP has a built-in WebDAV client service that needs to be enabled:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;Services&#039;&#039;&#039; console under &#039;&#039;&#039;Administrative Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; and find the &#039;&#039;&#039;WebClient&#039;&#039;&#039; service.&lt;br /&gt;
#Double-click on this service to open its &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the &#039;&#039;&#039;Startup Type&#039;&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;, then click the Start button to start the service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Internet Explorer 8.0 no longer supports web folders. See [http://blogs.msdn.com/b/askie/archive/2009/03/20/open-as-web-folder-not-in-the-internet-explorer-8-file-open-dialog.aspx this blog post from David Conner] for details. Instead, you will need to map a network drive (instructions on mapping a network drive are also given in David&#039;s blog post).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WebDAV path: /path/to/dir/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Roles and permissions|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-22663&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:WebDAV Repository]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=95037</id>
		<title>File system repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=95037"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:02:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
The file system repository allows users within Moodle to access files which have been uploaded via FTP into designated folders on the server.  A file system repository may be available site wide for everyone; within an individual course or for an individual user.(However - see this [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-28656  tracker entry] regarding course and individual repositories)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This must be done by a systems admin who  has write permissions to the server directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating  folders for your file system repositories===&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the moodledata folder on the server&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside it, create a folder  called &amp;quot;repository&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside that folder, create as many folders as you need, named appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Moodledatarepo2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*FTP into the appropriate folder the files you want. (The folders can hold all types of files)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enabling the File System repository plugin===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage Repositories&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select from the drop down next to File sytem &amp;quot;Enabled and visible&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filesystemrepo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a site-wide file system repository===&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the repository is enabled as above, click on the  &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down to Repositories instances of the site&lt;br /&gt;
*Click Create a repository instance&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitefilesystemrepo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and (if there are several folders on the server) choose from the dropdown the one you want. Click save&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Namedfilesystem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*It will now be available in the file picker in all courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Just repeat the process to get more than one site wide file system repository&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a repository inside a course===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE:  A regular user needs to have been given permission to do this by admin (MORE DETAILS SOON)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the desired course and click on “repositories” in the administration block&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Create File System instance&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Courseinstance.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up an individual file system repository instance===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: A regular user needs to have been given permission to do this by admin (MORE DETAILS SOON)&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the navigation block, click on “my profile”&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “repositories”&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click “create File System instance”&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This will create a personal file system repository connecting just you to a folder on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Privaterepo2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using it===&lt;br /&gt;
If you try to add a file in Moodle, then the File Picker should show you your new file system repository, and you should be able to browse it and select files to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that file types are respected (based on file extensions), so if you are adding an image in the editor, then you won&#039;t see Office docs (for example) appear in the File Picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filesystemeg.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Roles and permissions|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[File_system_repository_FAQ|File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview of [[Repositories|Repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2010/06/15/ftp-files-into-moodle-2-0-with-the-repository-api/ FTP files into Moodle 2.0 with the repository API article from somerandomthoughts.com] including screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dateisystem-Repository]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Legacy_course_files&amp;diff=95036</id>
		<title>Legacy course files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Legacy_course_files&amp;diff=95036"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:02:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: This page only applies to sites which have been upgraded from Moodle 1.9.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.0 onwards, files are stored in separate areas, rather than together in the course files area. See [[Course files]] for a detailed explanation. When a site is upgraded from 1.9, the course files area is renamed &#039;Legacy course files&#039;. By default, this area is not available in new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;It is recommended that teachers make use of the new [[Repositories|repositories]] in Moodle 2.0 for storing course files, rather than saving them in the legacy course files area&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling legacy course files areas==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable a legacy course files area in a new course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable the legacy course files repository plugin in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; [[Manage repositories]]&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check the legacyfilesinnewcourses box in the Manage repositories common settings then click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set &#039;Legacy course files&#039; to Yes in the course settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A legacy course files link will then appear in the &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration&#039;&#039; area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Roles and permissions|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja: レガシーコースファイル]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Server_files_repository&amp;diff=95035</id>
		<title>Server files repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Server_files_repository&amp;diff=95035"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T01:02:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}The server repository allows users with the correct permissions to see files on the server.  This might mean only files and folders in the context of the current course, or access to a file system that will allow them to use other courses files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access any repository, click on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File_Picker_blank_course.png|thumb|300px|center|A new course, with arrow point to  Server files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below is an example of drilling down.  The breadcrumb path has built in links to the level it represents.  In the example below, click on &amp;quot;English&amp;quot; and you will see folders representing all the courses in the English category at demo.moodle.org .&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:File_Picker_demo_moodle_legacy_files.png|center|Server files after drilling down in demo.moodle.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is accessible by default to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students. This [[Roles and permissions|capability]] can be changed to control access to users with specific roles.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Managing_repositories&amp;diff=95034</id>
		<title>Managing repositories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/pl/index.php?title=Managing_repositories&amp;diff=95034"/>
		<updated>2012-01-10T00:44:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Deraadt: Adding repository capability default information&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling repositories==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repositories can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage repositories&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A repository plugin may be set to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabled and visible - appears in the file picker&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabled and hidden&lt;br /&gt;
* Disabled - default setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order in which repositories are shown in the file picker may be set using the up and down arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Vocabulary==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Repository plugin&#039;&#039;&#039;: it is also called a repository type. It can be named Box.net, Flickr, Mahara, Youtube... Adding a plugin allow users to create instances of this plugin. Only instances are displayed into the file picker. Type only exist in order to let a Moodle administrator to deactivate/delete all instances of a type in one click.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Repository instance&#039;&#039;&#039;: An instance is displayed into the file picker and it is the access point to an external repository. An instance can have specific settings (for example be linked to a personal account).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*First case: when you add the plugin, an instance is automatically created and can not be edited. The Moodle administrator cannot change the instance name. The instance name displayed into the file picker will be exactly the same as the plugin name. For example Youtube, Box.net...&lt;br /&gt;
*Second case: the plugin allow the Moodle administrator to add multiple instances. An instance has a name for example Flickr Public access to Martin account, Martin&#039;s Mahara... &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;For this second case it is important to identify two different kind of instances:&lt;br /&gt;
#Common instances: The instances set by Moodle administrator in these same administration pages will be available into any file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
#Private instance: A teacher can set some instances available only for a course, and an user can set some instances only available for himself. In order to set instances for a course the teacher will go to the course page, and in order to set instances for a personal use, a user will go on his profile page. An administrator cannot add/edit private instances from the administration pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common repository settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common repository settings can be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Common Repository settings&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cache Expire===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify how long in seconds file listings are cached locally when browsing external repositories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow external links===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With some repositories such as Flickr, users can have the choice whether to copy the media into Moodle (the preferred solution) or to make a link to it instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Legacy course files in new courses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This repository is not normally available in new courses as it is designed for upgraded 1.9 courses. However, if it is checked here then it will appear when new courses are created - but certain backup and restore features won&#039;t work with it. See [[Legacy course files]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repositories and capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each repository plugin has a [[Roles and permissions|capability]] to control user access. This can be controlled for users of differing [[Roles and permissions|roles]]. Most, repositories distributed with Moodle are accessible to all roles, except the following repositories, which by default are accessible to administrators, course creators, teachers, editing teachers and managers, but not to guests or students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Legacy course files&lt;br /&gt;
* File system&lt;br /&gt;
* Server files&lt;br /&gt;
* WebDAV repository&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Deraadt</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>